2025 OWNER’S MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also
include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals
and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out of Charge, 12 Volt Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service.
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner Handbook for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................... 7
1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.............................................................12
2
3
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS.......................................83
3
4 INFOTAINMENT....................................................................................................102
4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING.......................................................................... 132
5
6 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS .......................................155
6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY............................................................................... 193
7
8 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE....................................................... 205
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 252
9
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE................................................................................255
10
11 INDEX......................................................................................................................260
11
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME..............................................................7
SYMBOLS KEY — DANGER, WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS.................................................8
Symbols Key..................................................... 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY..............................................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ................................................................... 12
Key Fob...........................................................12
Digital Key — If Equipped...............................15
Sentry Key...................................................... 17
REMOTE CLIMATE CONTROL ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED...................................................17
How To Use Remote Climate Control............ 17
To Exit Remote Climate Mode ...................... 18
Scheduled Cabin Conditioning (SCC)........... 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped...........................19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.... 19
Description..................................................... 19
To Arm The System........................................ 19
To Disarm The System...................................20
Rearming Of The System...............................20
Security System Manual Override................ 20
Tamper Alert...................................................20
Deluxe Vehicle Security System — If
Equipped .................................................. 20
DOORS ................................................................21
Power Door Locks ......................................... 21
Interior Door Opening ...................................22
Ke
yless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry......... 22
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit .................. 24
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ...........24
Manual Door Latching................................... 24
WINDOWS ...........................................................25
Power Window Controls.................................25
Automatic Window Features......................... 25
Reset Auto-Up ............................................... 26
Wind Buffeting .............................................. 26
MIRRORS ............................................................26
Inside Rearview Mirror.................................. 26
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors............................. 26
Outside Mirrors ............................................. 27
Outside Mirrors Logo Light — If Equipped.... 27
Power Mirrors ................................................ 27
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 27
USER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED....... 28
Description.....................................................28
Programming The Memory Feature..............28
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory..................................................... 28
Memory Position Recall.................................29
HEAD RESTRAINTS ............................................ 29
Safety Information......................................... 29
Front Head Restraints................................... 29
Rear Head Restraints.................................... 29
FRONT SEATS ..................................................... 30
Safety Information ........................................ 30
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 30
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 31
Front Heated Seats........................................33
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped........... 33
REAR SEATS ....................................................... 33
Rear Seat Easy Entry (2-Door Models)
— If Equipped............................................ 33
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)................. 35
Rear Heated Seats........................................ 36
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .....................36
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........36
Important Safety Precautions.......................36
Seat Belt Systems .........................................37
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)...43
Air Bag System Components.........................43
Air Bag Warning Light ................................... 43
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ................44
Front Air Bags.................................................44
Front Air Bag Operation ................................44
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features.................................................... 45
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
— Front Passenger Seat .......................... 45
Knee Impact Bolsters ...................................50
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags.........................50
Supplemental Side Air Bags......................... 50
Air Bag System Components.........................52
If A Deployment Occurs ................................53
Enhanced Accident Response System ........53
2
Enhanced Accident Response System
Rese
t Procedure (EV) ...............................53
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .................54
Event Data Recorder (EDR)...........................54
CHILD RESTRAINTS............................................ 54
Summary Of Recommendations For
Restraining Children In Vehicles.............. 55
Infant And Child Restraints........................... 55
Older Children And Child Restraints ............56
Children Too Large For Booster Seats .........56
Recommendations For Attaching Child
Restraints ................................................. 57
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System ........ 57
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle......................... 58
Locating The LATCH Anchorages.................. 59
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages....... 59
Center Seat LATCH.........................................60
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint....................................................60
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-
ALR Seat Belt:........................................... 60
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt.......................................61
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle....................................................... 61
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR): ........................................62
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Top Tether Anchorage:..............................63
STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS...................63
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped.............................. 63
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped.............................. 64
Heated Steering Wheel................................. 64
Electric Power Steering................................. 64
START BUTTON....................................................65
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Propulsion System.... 65
WIPERS AND WASHERS .................................... 66
Description.....................................................66
Windshield Wiper Operation......................... 66
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .............67
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..............................................67
Headlight Switch ...........................................67
Multifunction Lever .......................................68
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped .................................................. 68
High/Low Beam Switch ................................ 68
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped............68
Flash-To-Pass ................................................ 68
Automatic Headlights.................................... 68
Parking Lights ............................................... 68
Automatic Headlights On With Wipers
— If Equipped............................................ 69
Headlight Illumination On Approach.............69
Headlight Delay .............................................69
Lights-On Reminder ......................................69
Turn Signals ...................................................69
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............... 69
Battery Saver..................................................70
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................70
Description ....................................................70
Interior Courtesy Lights................................. 70
Front Map/Reading Lights............................ 70
Dimmer Control .............................................70
Attitude Adjustment Lighting — If
Equipped................................................... 70
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED...................... 71
Description..................................................... 71
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®............................................... 71
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels..........71
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device............71
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener..............................................72
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device...............................72
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................73
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming.......73
Security...........................................................73
Troubleshooting Tips......................................74
INTERIOR STORAGE AND FEATURES..................74
Glove Compartment.......................................74
Door Storage.................................................. 74
Console Features........................................... 74
Sunglasses Bin Door..................................... 75
3
USB/AUX Control ...........................................75
Power Outlets ................................................75
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped...........76
HATCH.................................................................. 77
Opening The Hatch........................................ 77
Closing The Hatch..........................................78
Hatch Safety...................................................79
Cargo Area Features......................................79
HOOD...................................................................80
Opening The Hood......................................... 80
Closing The Hood...........................................81
Frunk Safety — If Equipped........................... 82
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS
AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................................... 83
10.25 Inch Instrument Cluster..................... 83
16 Inch Instrument Cluster...........................84
Instrument Cluster Display............................85
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES...................90
Red Warning Lights........................................90
Yellow Warning Lights....................................93
Yellow Indicator Lights...................................96
Green Indicator Lights...................................96
Gray Indicator Lights......................................97
White Indicator Lights....................................97
Blue Indicator Lights......................................97
CLIMATE CONTROLS .......................................... 98
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .......................................... 98
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)........ 100
Climate Voice Commands........................... 100
Operating Tips .............................................100
INFOTAINMENT
INTRODUCTION ................................................102
Identifying Your radio ................................. 102
RADIO OPERATION, MOBILE PHONES, AND
CYBERSECURITY .........................................102
Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ........ 102
Cybersecurity............................................... 102
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS.................................... 103
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................. 103
Uconnect Voice Recognition....................... 103
Uconnect Settings....................................... 104
PERFORMANCE PAGES.................................... 123
Description...................................................123
Dodge Drive Modes — If Equipped.............126
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURE ...................................132
Normal Starting........................................... 132
AutoPark.......................................................132
After Starting............................................... 134
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using Start Button 134
BRAKES ............................................................135
Description...................................................135
Electric Park Brake .....................................135
TRANSMISSIONS ............................................. 136
Electric Drive Motor (EDM)..........................136
DRIVE MODES...................................................139
Operation..................................................... 139
EXHAUST........................................................... 140
Fratzonic Chambered Exhaust....................140
CHARGING.........................................................140
High Voltage Battery ...................................140
High Voltage Charging Operation .............. 142
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................... 152
Description ..................................................152
Vehicle Certification Label ......................... 152
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........ 153
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............. 153
Overloading..................................................153
Loading ....................................................... 153
TRAILER TOWING..............................................153
Description...................................................153
RECREATIONAL TOWING ................................. 153
Description ..................................................153
DRIVING TIPS....................................................153
Driving On Slippery Surfaces......................153
Driving Through Water ................................154
ENHANCED DRIVING
ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
SENSORS.......................................................... 155
Audible Pedestrian Warning System - If
Equipped.................................................155
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) — If
Equipped.................................................155
COLLISION AVOIDANCE ASSISTANCE SYSTEM 155
For
ward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation.............................. 155
Brake Assist System (BAS) .........................157
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTANCE SYSTEM...... 158
4
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............158
Traction Contr
ol System (TCS) ................... 160
BRAKING PERFORMANCE ASSISTANCE
SYSTEM........................................................ 160
Brake System Warning Light.......................160
Ready Alert Braking (RAB).......................... 160
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). 160
Rain Brake Support (RBS).......................... 160
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 160
VISIBILITY ASSISTANCE SYSTEM..................... 161
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped................................................. 161
LANE CENTERING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM........ 164
Active Lane Management System — If
Equipped.................................................164
Active Driving Assist System — If
Equipped.................................................166
PARKING AND REVERSE OPERATIONS
ASSISTANCE SYSTEM.................................. 170
ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist System170
ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.................177
Surround View Camera System — If
Equipped................................................. 178
DRIVER ATTENTION ASSISTANCE SYSTEM......180
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) — If
Equipped.................................................180
SPEED CONTROL ASSISTANCE SYSTEM..........181
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).....................181
OFF ROAD AND LOW-RANGE OPERATIONS
ASSISTANCE SYSTEM.................................. 188
Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................................188
UTILITY FEATURES ASSISTANCE SYSTEM....... 188
Traffic Sign Assist System...........................188
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).. 189
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 193
Description ..................................................193
ASSIST AND SOS — IF EQUIPPED.................... 193
Description...................................................193
TIRE REPAIR KIT — IF EQUIPPED..................... 195
Description...................................................195
JUMP STARTING ...............................................200
Description ..................................................200
Preparations For Jump Start.......................201
Jump Starting Procedure............................ 202
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE.............................203
Description...................................................203
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 203
Description...................................................203
Without The Key Fob................................... 204
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)............................................204
Description...................................................204
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)........................204
Description...................................................204
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE
CARE
SAFETY TIPS .................................................... 205
Transporting Passengers............................ 205
Transporting Pets ....................................... 205
Connected Vehicles.....................................205
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .............................................205
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle..................... 206
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE............................207
Maintenance Plan ...................................... 207
UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT.........................209
Underhood Compartment...........................209
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE...................................210
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................... 210
Body Lubrication .........................................211
Windshield Wiper Blades ........................... 212
Cooling System............................................ 212
Brake System ..............................................214
FUSES ...............................................................215
General Information.................................... 215
Underhood Fuses.........................................215
Rear Interior Fuses......................................223
LIGHT REPLACEMENT ..................................... 233
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers................................................. 233
Replacing Exterior Bulbs.............................233
TIRES AND WHEELS......................................... 234
Tire Safety Information ...............................234
Tires — General Information .......................241
Tire Types..................................................... 244
Spare Tires — If Equipped .......................... 244
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................... 245
Snow Traction Devices................................ 245
Tire Rotation Recommendations................246
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION............... 247
5
Description................................................... 247
Treadwear.....................................................247
Traction Grades............................................247
Temperature Grades................................... 248
VEHICLE STORAGE ...........................................248
Description...................................................248
BODYWORK AND EXTERIOR CARE ................. 249
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........249
Body And Underbody Maintenance............249
Preserving The Bodywork............................249
INTERIOR CARE ............................................... 250
Seats And Fabric Parts................................250
Plastic And Coated Parts............................ 250
Leather Surfaces.........................................250
Glass Surfaces ........................................... 251
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 252
Description...................................................252
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............................252
Specifications.............................................. 252
FLUID CAPACITIES ........................................... 253
Specifications ............................................. 253
WHEELS AND TIRES ........................................ 253
Description ..................................................253
Torque Specifications..................................253
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................... 255
Prepare For The Appointment.................... 255
Prepare A List.............................................. 255
Be Reasonable With Requests...................255
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE............................... 255
Roadside Assistance...................................255
FCA US LLC Customer Center.....................256
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center.............256
Mexico..........................................................256
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands..............256
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)............. 257
Service Contract.......................................... 257
WARRANTY INFORMATION............................... 257
MOPAR® PARTS................................................257
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS.........................257
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C..................................... 257
In Canada.....................................................258
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION.............................258
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS......... 258
GENERAL INFORMATION..................................259
6
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual
has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by
customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and
conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which
may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in
the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for
technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
SYMBOLS KEY — DANGER, WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating
procedures that could result in a colli-
sion, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your vehi-
cle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionali-
ty.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to
be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when
operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
ð
page 90.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
ð
page 90
Brake Warning Light
ð
page 91
Brake Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 92
8 INTRODUCTION
Red Warning Lights
Battery Charge Warning Light
ð
page 92
Low High-Voltage Charge Warning Light
ð
page 92
Charging System Fault Warning Light
ð
page 93
Traction Battery Failure Warning Light
ð
page 93
High Voltage Coolant Low Warning Light
ð
page 93
Service Electrical System Warning Light — If Equipped
ð
page 92
Turtle Mode Warning Light
ð
page 93
Door Open Warning Light
ð
page 92
Red Warning Lights
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
ð
page 92
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
ð
page 93
Hood Open Warning Light
ð
page 92
Hatch Open Warning Light
ð
page 92
Vehicle Security Warning Light
ð
page 93
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
ð
page 93
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS) Fault Warning Light — If Equip-
ped
ð
page 94
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Yellow Warning Lights
Brake Temperature Warning Light
ð
page 94
Electric Park Brake Failure Warning Light
ð
page 94
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
ð
page 94
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
ð
page 94
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
ð
page 94
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
ð
page 95
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
ð
page 96
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
ð
page 95
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
ð
page 95
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
ð
page 95
Green Indicator Lights
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
ð
page 96
Plug Status Indicator Light
ð
page 96
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
ð
page 96
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
ð
page 96
10 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, and Remote Climate Activation. The key
fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors, hatch, and
charge port door, as well as activate the Panic Alarm
from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key
fob.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key fob will
operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
● The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
ð
page 76.
● With the vehicle in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
Key Fob
1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock
3 — Remote Climate Control Activation
4 — Power Hatch
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Panic
In case the power button does not change positions
with the push of a button, the k
ey fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will
display directions to follow.
For more information on power button positions, see
ð
page 65.
NOTE:
A lo
w key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the
LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no
longer illuminates after a key fob button is pushed, then
the key fob battery requires replacement
ð
page
259.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Hatch
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds
to unlock all the doors, hatch and charge port door. To
lock all the doors, hatch, and charge port door, push
the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is equipped with the Auto Relock
feature, and is unlocked with the key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and the Vehicle Security system will arm (if
equipped). This feature can be enabled/disabled
within Uconnect Settings.
● If one or more doors are open, or the hatch is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
again automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will
stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
ð
page 104.
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic feature is
activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn may
pulse on and off (if equipped with horn alarm), and the
interior lights will turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
● The interior lights will turn off if you place the vehicle
in the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is
activated. However, the exterior lights and horn (if
equipped with horn alarm) will remain on.
● You may need to be closer than 66 ft (20 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic feature due to the radio frequency noises
emitted by the system.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle is in the ON/RUN position, the
message “Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown
in the instrument cluster display along with an interior
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also be
activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
● The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
● These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s electric motor is left running with
the key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals
are blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450 battery.
NOTE:
● Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
● Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
● Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
● Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key
fob above the top row buttons blinks when a button
is pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum
of three years with normal vehicle usage.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
emergency k
ey release button (1) on the side of
the key fob, and pulling the emergency key (2) out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
Emergency Key Removed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left
side between the housing and the back cover of
the key fob. Use a small flat-bladed tool to pry
open the left side of the fob cover while applying
pressure until the cover snaps open.
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves
3. Ne
xt, locate bottom left of the key fob and pry off
the battery cover by lifting upward.
Key Fob Battery Location
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to slide
the battery downward and back toward the key
ring.
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push
down and slide the battery under the small lip on
the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. T
o assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge
of the back cover with the top of the fob, and
press the edges into the interlocking hinges until
all edges snap together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into
place.
NOTE:
The k
e
y fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
● The int
egrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do no
t ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
● If you think a battery may have been swallowed
or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
● Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Ke
y Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
● Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
14 GETTING TO KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Alw
ays remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all door
s when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Propulsion System, always remember to place the
power button in the OFF position when exiting the
vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This pr
ocedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
● When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
● Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
● It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
DIGITAL KEY — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ability to use
your iPhone
®
device as a Digital Key to lock/unlock and
start the vehicle
ð
page 259. To enable this feature,
complete the following steps:
Owner Digital Key Pairing Procedure:
1. Ensure your vehicle has been enrolled in Dodge
®
Connect and you have created your Owner Account
(same credentials used to access your Dodge
®
app).
2. Once successfully enr
olled with the Dodge
®
App,
navigate to the home screen and look for the
Digital Key menu. This can be found either by
swiping left through the tile carousel or by tapping
the access tile on the home screen. To begin the
owner key pairing process, tap ‘’Start Pairing’’ or
‘’Continue to Wallet’’ depending on the version of
App in use. Please note that the tile will not be
populated until the terms of service and privacy
policy have been accepted.
3. Navigate to the Digital Key App in the Uconnect
vehicle audio system.
4. Select “Add Owner Key”.
5. Follow the prompts in your iPhone
®
device wallet
to continue the owner Digital Key pairing process
6. To pair an iPhone as your digital key, hold the
iPhone with its NFC antenna against the NFC
reader on the vehicle's wireless charging pad until
the key is paired successfully.
The Uconnect system will display a success pop-up
once the owner key pairing is complete.
Owner Digital Key Pairing
Tap Access
Available on compatible iPhone
®
's devices without UWB
(ultra-wide band) hardware.
● To unlock the vehicle, tap the iPhone
®
device
against the driver door frame at the location
depicted in the image.
● T
o start the vehicle, tap the iPhone
®
de
vice with
its NFC antenna against the NFC wireless charger.
Then, press the brake pedal and the Start button.
Digital Key On Drivers Side Door Frame
Digital Key On Wireless Charging Pad
Hands-free Access
A
vailable on compatible iPhone
®
's devices with UWB
(ultra-wide band) hardware.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
● With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the door handle, grab the handle t
o unlock and
open the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle
will unlock the driver door automatically. Grabbing
the passenger door handle will unlock all doors and
the hatch automatically.
● To start the vehicle, press the brake pedal and the
Start button together while carrying your iPhone
®
device.
In the event that the vehicle does not unlock on
grabbing the door handle, move the iPhone
®
device
closer to the drivers side door frame.
NOTE:
● In order to use Digital Key, the iPhone
®
device must
meet certain hardware and software requirements.
Please check with your iPhone
®
device manufacturer
for regional compatibility requirements and feature
availability.
● NFC Icon. To use NFC functionality within
the cabin for owner key pairing and
vehicle start, ensure the NFC antenna of
the iPhone
®
device is placed against the wireless
charger
ð
page 76 with the NFC icon.
● For additional safety, it is recommended that you
carry the back-up NFC card with you at all times
to cover instances such as loss of phone or phone
which requires its battery to be charged.
● In case your iPhone
®
device powers off due to
lack of charge, the Digital Key will still function for
NFC tap access. This power reserve functionality is
available for up to 5 hours after the device has
powered off. Please note that this feature will not
be available if the phone has been manually turned
off by the user.
● For any service related activities, users are required
to carry along and hand over physical keys to the
service dealer.
● If the vehicle detects a key (digital or physical) in
the cabin, the doors will not lock. Please check for
presence of Digital Keys or key fobs in the cabin.
● Hands-free access for the digital key may be
temporarily suspended if the digital key has been
present in the vicinity of the doors for an extended
period of time.
KEY SHARING
As the owner you have the ability to share Digital Keys
with iPhone
®
users. To share a Digital Key complete the
following steps:
Sharing A Digital Key
1. Beginning with the owner’s iPhone
®
, navigate to
device wallet and select the Digital Key.
2. Locate the sharing icon to select the phone
contact you wish to share the Digital Key with.
3. To continue, select the type of access to be
provided with the Digital Key (sharing options
could include full access or unlock only).
4. It is recommended you share keys with an
activation code for maximum security.
Once Digital Key options have been selected and sent
to shared contact, they cannot be edited unless access
is revoked and re-shared.
Receiving A Digital Key
1
. Upon receiving a Digital Key invitation message
from the owner, click the message link to proceed.
2. Input activation code from vehicle owner.
3. Digital Key will now be added to your wallet.
NOTE:
In certain instances, the vehicle systems may require
additional time to respond to a shared digital key
unlock request (e.g. a newly created key approaches
the vehicle for the first time).
KEY DELETION
iPhone
®
Procedure:
1. Navigate to iPhone
®
wallet.
2. Tap the Digital Key and proceed to remove the key
by using the menu option provided.
Uconnect System Procedure:
1. Within the App drawer, select “Digital Key App”.
2. Select which phone you wish to remove by tapping
the delete button provided.
3. The owner iPhone
®
will show a delete
authorization pop-up to confirm that it is safe to
delete the key. Selecting “Approve” in the pop-up
will confirm key deletion and selecting “Deny” will
prevent the key from being deleted via the vehicle
Uconnect system. Before approving deletion of a
digital key, owners must ensure users are not left
stranded without a key.
16 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Owners should delete all paired digital keys from the
vehicle at the end of ownership. Deleting the connected
vehicle APP or the resetting the Uconnect system to
factory will not delete paired digital keys. Users are
required to delete keys as per the process mentioned
above or by reaching out to the call center to perform a
‘Return to New’ process which will delete all associated
connected vehicle information from the cloud servers
and delete all owner and shared digital keys.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the electric
motor. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless Start button and a
Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the vehicle in the ON position, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb
check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone attempted to start the electric
motor with an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid
key fob is used to start the electric motor but there is
an issue with the vehicle electronics, the electric motor
will start and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
ð
page
259.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
REMOTE CLIMATE CONTROL ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Remote climate activation on EV while plugged in may
not always start the electric motor.
This system uses the key fob to start
the vehicle conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Climate Control activates the Climate
Control system and vented seats in temperatures above
80°F (26.7°C). It activates the heated seats, heated
steering wheel, heated mirrors and rear defroster in
temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE CLIMATE CONTROL
Push and release the Remote Climate Control button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors
will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will
chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the vehicle will start,
and remain in the Remote Climate Control mode for a
15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Climate Control button a third time
shuts the vehicle off.
NOTE:
● With Remote Climate Control, the vehicle will only
run for 15 minutes.
● Remote Climate Control can only be used twice.
● If an electric motor fault is present or battery level is
low, the vehicle will turn on and then shut down in
10 seconds.
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Climate Control mode.
● For security, power window and power sunroof (if
equipped) operations are disabled when the vehicle
is in Remote Climate Control mode.
● The vehicle must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
All of the following conditions must be met before
Remote Climate will engage:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Hatch closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● 12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
● Key fob Panic button not pushed
● System not disabled from previous Remote Climate
event
● Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
● Vehicle in the OFF position
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off while vehicle
is in propulsion system active
● Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light is not
illuminated
● Electric Vehicle Service Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remo
te Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE
CLIMATE MODE
Push and release the Remote Climate button one time
or allow the Remote Climate cycle to complete the
entire 15 minute cycle.
In addition, the Start button can be cycled to the RUN
(Pre-Propulsion System Active) position by pressing the
Start button with the key fob in the vehicle, and then
pushing the Start button one more time to place the
vehicle in the OFF position.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
temporarily disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
SCHEDULED CABIN CONDITIONING (SCC)
This feature allows the driver to pre-condition (warm up
or cool down) the passenger cabin based on a planned
departure time. The target temperature is preset to
the same values used by the Remote Start feature.
Unlike Remote Start, the driver does not need to initiate
the cabin conditioning by pushing the Remote Start
button, instead, a programmed departure time will be
used. Also, all scheduled cabin conditioning will be
powered by the vehicle’s high voltage battery working
in conjunction with any EVSE connected to the vehicle.
In order to conserve the vehicle’s high voltage battery
power, the driver can choose between allowing the
battery to be drained of power down to <1%, or to
stop the SCC when the high voltage battery has been
depleted to 25% State Of Charge (SOC). The battery
percentages are displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
A maximum of two independent schedule event timers
are av
ailable for use by the SCC feature and Scheduled
Charging feature for charging the high voltage battery.
The timers may be used in any combination for SCC
and Scheduled Charging, but only two total timers are
available.
The SCC event times are used to wake up the vehicle
so that the Climate Control system can condition the
passenger cabin prior to the scheduled departure
time. Based on vehicle operating conditions, ambient
temperature, and the next programmed departure
time, the vehicle will determine when to begin cabin
conditioning. Cabin conditioning can begin up to
30 minutes prior to the scheduled departure time,
provided the stated high voltage battery conditions are
met.
The SCC will continue for a maximum of 15 minutes
after the scheduled departure time.
Once a scheduled event has been created, it can be
applied to one or more days of the week. The scheduled
event can also be set to occur only during the current
week, or repeat every week until the feature is turned
off or the event is changed.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will initiate a scheduled SCC event:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors Closed
● Rear Compartment Closed
● Hazard switch off
● 12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
● Key fob not located inside the vehicle
18 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Vehicle power button in the OFF position
● R
emote Start has not been activated
Scheduling An SCC Event:
1. Select the Electric Vehicle App on the touchscreen.
2. Select “Schedules”.
Schedules Screen
3. Choose “Climat
e Schedules”.
4. Select one of two Climate Schedules by pressing
the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
touchscreen.
5. Select if SCC should stop when the high voltage
battery drops to 25% or lower.
6. Set the Manual Climate Schedule Departure Time:
Hours, Minutes, and AM/PM or set the Auto
Climate Schedule Departure Time: Hours, Minutes,
AM/PM, and Temperature.
Set Manual Climate Schedule
7.
Select the days that this SCC event will occur. The
“Repeat” indicator illuminates to indicate that SCC
will occur every week on the selected day(s), at the
selected time.
If you uncheck the “Repeat” option, all the days
of the week will be grayed out and the vehicle
will perform only one SCC event, which will occur
at the next available time that matches the SCC
event time (regardless of what day it was originally
set to occur before “Repeat” was unchecked).
8. To schedule another SCC event, press the X and
repeat these steps.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Climate Control is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote
Climate Control will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and
operation will continue.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
E
QUIPPED
D
ESCRIPTION
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, hatchback, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
system is armed, interior switches for door locks and
hatch release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals:
● The horn will pulse
● The turn signals will flash
● The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle is placed in the OFF
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
● Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
ð
page 22.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
ð
page 22.
● Place the vehicle out of the OFF position to disarm
the system.
NOTE:
● The driver's door key latch cylinder and the hatch
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key latch
cylinder when the system is armed will sound the
alarm when the door is opened.
● If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the
hatch, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and
the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked
unless all doors are set to unlock on first press
within Uconnect Settings.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm, regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnect
ed, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system
in your absence, the horn will sound three times and
the exterior lights will blink three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors,
hood latch, and hatchback for unauthorized entry and
the ON/RUN power button for unauthorized operation.
The system also includes a dual function intrusion
sensor and vehicle tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor
monitors the vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle tilt
sensor monitors the vehicle for any tilting actions (tow
away, tire removal, ferry transport, etc.).
If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the
horn will sound for 29 seconds and the exterior lights
will flash followed by approximately five seconds of no
activity. This will continue for eight cycles if no action is
taken to disarm the system.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the security system:
1. If any doors or windows are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle is in the OFF position.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
● Touch the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a key fob available in the
same exterior zone
ð
page 22.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
● When armed, the interior motion sensor detects
movement within the vehicle's interior, including
moving objects (i.e. people and pets) and air
currents through open windows or the sunroof. The
windows and sunroof should be closed, and moving
objects should not be left in the vehicle when the
intrusion detection is armed, otherwise false alarms
can occur.
● Once the security system is armed, it remains in
that state until you disarm it by following either of
20 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the disarming procedures described. If a power loss
occurs after arming the system, you must disarm
the system after restoring power to prevent alarm
activation.
● The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming
the Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the
lock button on the key fob three times within 15
seconds of arming the system (while the Vehicle
Security Light is flashing rapidly). The vehicle will
remain locked but will disable the alarm in the case
of repeated false alarms due to ambient conditions.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
ð
page 22.
● Turn the vehicle out of the OFF position by pushing
the ON/RUN Power button (requires at least one
valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
● The driver's door key latch cylinder and the hatch
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
● The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power hatch entry. If a valid key fob or Passive
Entry is used to open the hatch, the motion sensing
will be suppressed until after the hatch is closed.
If someone enters the opened vehicle through the
hatch, then opens an
y door, the alarm will sound.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
● The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
the Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can
turn off the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming
the Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the
lock button on the key fob three times within 15
seconds of arming the system (while the Vehicle
Security Light is flashing rapidly). The vehicle will
remain locked but will disable the alarm in the case
of repeated false alarms due to ambient conditions.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock, or an emergency
lock lever.
DOORS
In the e
vent of a power failure, please see the Manual
Door Latching section
ð
page 24 for additional
information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock aut
omatically if the key fob
is detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button
on the front door panel is used to lock the door. This
will occur for two attempts. Upon the third attempt, the
doors will lock even if the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless signal
may get blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
If the door lock switch is pushed while the vehicle is in
the ON/RUN position and the driver's door is open, the
doors will not lock.
INTERIOR DOOR OPENING
The door can be opened by pressing the button located
on each front door panel. If all doors are locked,
pressing the button on either door will unlock the
other door and hatch. This ability can be activated or
deactivated via Uconnect Settings
ð
page 104.
NOTE:
Press the button three times in two seconds to open
the doors in motion at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h).
Below 3 mph (5 km/h) doors will open at first press.
Power Door Button Opening
The doors can also be lock
ed and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go - Passive Entry system.
Manual Door Opening
If the electronic door button does not work, for example
if the 12V battery of the car is low, the doors can still
be opened from the inside by pulling the manual door
handle locat
ed on each fr
ont door.
NOTE:
If after using the manual door handle, the door does
not close, you must rotate the manual latching backup
lever.
Manual Door Handle
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE ENTRY
The P
assive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
● Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 104.
● The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal
and prevent the Passive Entry system from locking/
unlocking the v
ehicle.
● P
assive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
whichever time is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90
seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lights.
● If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing,
or there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
● The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
● If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and (if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security
system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock and
open the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle
will unlock the driver door automatically. Grabbing the
passenger door handle will unlock all doors and the
hatch automatically.
22 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
● Either the driv
er door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
ð
page 104.
● All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the power button
is in the OFF position.
The following situations will trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
● A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
● A lock req
uest is made b
y the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
● A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
● The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
● Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
● There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Hatch
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
● Af
ter pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle.
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle
unlocking.
● If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-
Safe)" remains active/functional.
● The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Hatch
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the deck lid, push the button located on the right side
of the deck lid.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Hatch Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If y
ou inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive Entry
key fob in the hatch and try to close the deck lid, the
deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one
of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid
ð
page
259.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks after the following sequence of
actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 104.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed
in PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
MANUAL DOOR LATCHING
Your vehicle is equipped with frameless glass doors.
The frameless glass door system is equipped with
a smart drop feature that ensures the glass lowers
slightly when the door is opened. This function prevents
the glass edge from making contact with the metal
retainer that attaches the door seal to the vehicle. This
feature relies on the vehicle having power.
In the event of a power failure please see the following
sections for steps and precautions on manual door
operation.
If the windows are in the full up position:
When the vehicle has lost power, the smart drop
feature will not function properly, and opening or
closing the doors can result in damage to the glass or
the door seals.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle loses power, avoid operating the doors
until power is restored or damage to the glass or seal
could result.
If the windows are in the full-down or partially-down
position:
Manually unlatch the driver door by removing the cover
plate over the latch release cylinder on the exterior
door handle. Insert the emergency key from the key fob
into the latch release and turn towards the rear of the
vehicle.
Driver’s Door Latch Release
All doors can be manually latched b
y turning the latch
cylinder in the inside door frame. Using the emergency
key from the key fob, turn the latch and then shut the
door.
24 GETTING T
O KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
Door Close Manual Latch
NOTE:
● The manual latch cylinder t
o close the door is only
accessible when the door is open.
WARNING!
● F
or personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the v
ehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
power button is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible t
o children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Propulsion
System in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
WINDOWS
POWER
WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operat
ed by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when
the vehicle is in the ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch do
wn briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the power button is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The timing is programmable within Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 104.
NOTE:
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not le
t children play with power windows. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Propulsion System in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down to the second detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the
switch briefly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Pull the window switch up to the second detent and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To av
oid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO-U
P
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up pull the window
switch up to close the window completely and continue
to hold the switch up for an additional three seconds
after the window is closed.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffe
ting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear
view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spra
y any cleaning solution directly ont
o the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY
MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-R
od feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be e
xtended while the sun visor
is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
LOGO LIGHT — IF
EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
logo lighting contain one LED, which is located on the
underside of the mirror head. The logo light supplies
illuminated entry lighting, which turns on in both mirrors
when you use the remote keyless entry key fob or open
any door. This LED shines on to the ground projecting
an illuminated Dodge logo.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls can be adjusted by a
direction control knob. To adjust a mirror, rotate the
mirror direction control knob for the mirror that you
want to adjust. Rotate the knob counterclockwiseto "L"
for the left mirror or clockwise to "R" for the right mirror.
NOTE:
Once mirrors are adjusted to the the drivers preferred
angle, rotate the direction control knob to the neutral
position in order to prevent inadvertent adjustment of
the mirror
s while driving.
Power Mirror Control
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Neutral Position
3 — Right Mirror Selection
4 — Mirror Direction Control
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Driver Memor
y Settings feature
ð
page
28.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated whenever
you turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped)
ð
page 98.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
USER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position
settings for the following features:
● Driver seat
● Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
● Side mirrors (if equipped)
● Power tilt/telescoping steering column (if equipped)
● A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
● Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can
be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
● Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory settings switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
● The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
● The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Setting Switch
PROGRAMMING THE
MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected
profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle in the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memor
y pr
ofiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB TO
MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect
system
ð
page 104.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1)
or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within 10
seconds.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NO
TE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK,
a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or
the unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired
memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings are recalled when using Passive Entry
to unlock the driver's door with a linked key fob.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
SAFETY INFORMATION
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driv
er
, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
NOTE:
Do not re
verse the head restraints (making the rear of
the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
Your vehicle is equipped with either front two-way driver
and passenger head restraints or fixed front head
restraints.
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see an
authorized dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Fixed F
ront Head Restraints — If Equipped
The non-adjustable head restraints consist of a
trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the
seatbacks and are intended to help protect you and the
passenger from neck injury.
Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, on-road positions
so that the head restraint is positioned as close as
possible to the back of your head.
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions:
up or down. When the center seat is being occupied,
the head restraint should be in the raised position.
When there are no occupants in the center seat, the
head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for
the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located at the base of the head
restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
Adjustment Button
NOTE:
● The head restraint should only be remo
ved by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
the center rear head restraint requires removal, see
an authorized dealer.
● The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle t
o properly protect the occupants. Follow
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
FRONT SEATS
SAFETY
INFORMATION
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● It is danger
ous t
o ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL A
DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
danger
ous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models ma
y be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar locat
ed
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward
or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Seats should be adjust
ed bef
ore fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline
To adjust the seatback
, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback,
lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Manual Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The front driv
er seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Recline Lever
POWER
ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way or
twelve-way power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the seat. There are four switches that control the
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Cushion Length Adjuster
2 — Cushion Extender Switch
3 — Seatback and Bolster Adjustment Switch
4 — Power Lumbar Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the cushion seat switch forward or rearward. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of cushion
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
of the cushion seat switch, the front of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward by pushing the the seatback and bolster
adjustmenet switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction the switch is moved. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Mo
ving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
im
pede its ability t
o move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Seatback Bolster Adjustment — If
Equipped
The front driver and passenger seatback bolsters can
be extended outward, or retracted inward by pushing
the bolster adjustment button located in the center of
the seatback and bolster adjustment switch.
Push the top of the button to extend the bolsters, or
push the bottom of the button to retract the bolsters.
Seatback Bolster Adjustment Button
1 — Extend Seatback Bolsters
2 — Retract Seatback Bolsters
Cushion Extender
The cushion can be extended forward a few inches
(centimeters) to increase thigh support. Push the
cushion extender switch forward or rearward to extend
or retract the cushion. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles eq
uipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s power button in the OFF position.
● When you place the vehicle’s power button in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4
inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position
is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the vehicle’s
power button in the ACC or RUN position.
● The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile
ð
page 28.
32 GETTING T
O KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
through the programmable features in the Uconnect
system
ð
page 104.
FRONT HEATED SEATS
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You
can gain access to the control buttons
through the climate screen and the controls
screen.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in the touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Three indicator
arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO. Turning the
heating elements off will return the user to the radio
screen.
● Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
● Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
● The electric motor must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 17.
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of adv
anced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
● Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
FRONT VENTILA
TED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans
that can be controlled through the climate
and control screen in the Uconnect system.
The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
● Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
● Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
● Press the ventilat
ed seat button a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The electric motor must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 17.
REAR SEATS
REAR SEAT EASY ENTRY (2-DOOR MODELS)
— IF EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an Easy Entry
feature on the fronts seats, allowing for improved
access to the rear seats. The Easy Entry function is
available with both power and manual seats for forward
and rearward adjustment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Power Seat Operation
To operate the Rear Seat Easy Entry feature for power
seats:
1. Pull up on the EZE strap located on the back of the
seat just below the headrest.
Power Seat EZE Strap
2. R
otate the seatback forward.
Rotate Power Seat Forward Manually
3. Once the seatback begins t
o tilt forward, the seat
tracks automatically move forward for rear seat
access.
NOTE:
If the seat det
ects an obstacle, the seat track will
move back to its previous position. The seatback
will remain rotated forward.
Forward Power Engaged
To re
turn the power seat to original position:
● Rotate the seatback rearward until it re-locks. The
seat tracks will automatically move back to its
previous position.
Manual Seat Operation
To operate the Easy Entry feature for manual seats:
1. Pull up on the EZE strap located on the back of the
seat just below the headrest.
Manual Seat EZE Strap
2. R
otate the seatback forward, the seat tracks will
unlock.
Rotate Seatback Forward
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the seat forward to provide more access to
the rear seat.
Slide Seat Forward
To re
turn the manual seat to original position:
● Lift up on the seatback and push rearward. Continue
pushing until seat track is locked into place.
● The seatback can be locked at any angle within
its range. Once the seatback is rotated back, it
will return to its previous recline position and lock
securely.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could im
pair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seatbacks can be f
olded
forward to provide an additional storage area. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat e
xtension of the hatch load floor.
To fold the rear seatback, pull on the lever located on
the upper seatback.
Rear Seatback Lever
Aft
er releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is unfolded into the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on
the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
● Be cer
tain that the seatback is securely locked
int
o position. If the seatback is not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
● The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
● To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
WARNING!
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
● Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
● Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
● Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
REAR HEATED SEATS
On some models, the tw
o rear outboard
seats may be equipped with heated seats.
There are two heated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat
in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO, and none for off.
● Push the switch once to turn the HI setting on.
● Push the switch a second time to turn the LO setting
on.
● Push the switch a third time t
o turn the heating
elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off
automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
● Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
● The electric motor must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
● Seat Belt Systems
● Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
● Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some sim
ple st
eps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
ð
page
54.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as
possible and use the proper child restraint
ð
page 54.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see your Owner Handbook for customer service
contact information.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deplo
ying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SY
STEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAler
t)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the power
button is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the power button is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal
for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the power button is
first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat
belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or other items are placed on the outboard front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your v
ehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
se
vere injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
● In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Be sure e
v
eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
● A lap belt worn t
oo high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
● A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
(Continued)
WARNING!
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
● A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
● A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
● A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
● A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
● A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
(Continued)
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA US LLC dealer
or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1.
Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough t
o fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. P
osition the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. P
osition the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6.
T
o release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot
at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage — If Equipped
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shor
ter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
(Continued)
WARNING!
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
● Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
● Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second ro
w center seat belt may feature a seat belt
with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate
and buckle (if equipped) should remain connected at
all times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle become
disconnected, they must be properly reconnected prior
to the rear center seat belt being used by an occupant.
1. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2. When the seat belt is long enough t
o fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plat
e up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
40 GETTING T
O KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5. P
osition the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Latch Plate Buckle Inserted
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle.
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle, insert a tool into the pinhole on the mini-
buckle.
WARNING!
● If the mini-latch plat
e and mini-buckle are no
t
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to
provide proper restraint and will increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
● When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch
plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and
reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough t
o fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
req
uired in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
● Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in
the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn b
y all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the
event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from
the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for
all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with an Energy Management feature that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable A
utomatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system
ð
page 61.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used f
or normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
aut
omatically pre-lock
ed. The seat belt will still retract
to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deplo
ying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1.
Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
42 GETTING TO KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
● The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable A
ut
omatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
● Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
● Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the saf
ety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
follo
wing Air Bag System Components:
AIR BAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument P
anel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
power button is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the power button is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately two to eight
seconds for a self-check when the power button is first
in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs,
have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the two to eight seconds when the power button is
first in the ON/RUN position.
● The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the two
to eight-second interval.
● The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any electric motor
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the power button is first
turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
REDUNDANT AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
ð
page 90.
FRONT AIR BAGS
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front
air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front
air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
P
assenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
● Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
(Continued)
WARNING!
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
FRONT AIR BAG
OPERATION
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it
takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER FRONT AIR BAG
FEATURES
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is
designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied
seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies
them in a category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light
(an amber light located on the overhead sports
bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
● No objects should be placed o
v
er or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
● Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
(Continued)
WARNING!
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
● Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SY
STEM (OCS)
— FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It
is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied
seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies
them in a category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of
The Following:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
● Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light –
an amber light located on the overhead console
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classif
ication Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
uses the classification to determine whether it should
activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as designed,
it is important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly
seated passengers are:
● Sitting upright
● Facing forward
● Sitting in the cent
er of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
● Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
● The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it.
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child or small adult.
● The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled Indicator
Lights (“P
AD”) Status
F
ront Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat Unbuckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled Indicator
Lights (“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint
or booster seat*
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” ACTIVATED
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint
system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deplo
ying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light locat
ed on the overhead
console) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
PAD Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision. When the
front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects
are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag will not deploy and the PAD indicator light
illuminates “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”.
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” should be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front
passenger seat. If an adult is not seated properly, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may deactivate and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” will be illuminated .
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” should be illuminated
and the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be
deactivated if the seat is empty or if it is occupied by
a rear-facing child restraint with a child up to six years
old. NEVER assume the Passenger A
dvanced Front Air
Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD
indicatior light will illuminate.
If The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Light Is Illuminated
For An Adult Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger
seat and the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" is illuminated,
the passenger may be sitting improperly. Follow the
steps below to allow the OCS to detect the adult
passenger’s seated weight to activate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger
step out of the vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger
seat, such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat
massagers, blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the
seat, with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or
near the floor, and with their back against the
seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain
in this seated position for two to three minutes
after restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
● • If “P
ASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” remains
illuminated f
or an adult passenger, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury or death. If the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy in the event of a collision.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Children 12 y
ears or y
ounger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore,
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not
be activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult (depending on size) who is seated in the
passenger seat. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or
deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an
adult is in the front passenger seat, have the passenger
reposition his or her body in the seat until “PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON” is illuminated.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS
determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front
passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which may result in deactivation or activation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious
injury or death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
● The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest
or instrument panel).
● The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
● The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
● The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
● Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
● Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
● Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
● Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
● If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seat
ed
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
(Continued)
WARNING!
occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
● Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different than the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, which
may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status.
A malfunction in the OCS may af
fect the operation of
the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or stays on after you start the
vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
● Ignoring the Air Bag W
arning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you w
on’t have the
air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light
does not come on as a bulb check when the power
button is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
WARNING!
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
● • If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” and the Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate to show that the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.
Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault
is cleared. This indicates that you should take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
com
ponents that may af
fect Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do
not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
● Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
● Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat co
ver and cushion specif
ied for the
vehicle.
● Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
● Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
● At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related component
or fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
● Unapproved modifications or service procedures
to the passenger seat assembly
, its related
components, seat cover, or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment in
case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
● If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
KNEE IMPACT BOLSTERS
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
WARNING!
● Do no
t drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolster
s in any way.
● Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
SUPPLEMENTAL DRIVER AND FRONT
PASSENGER KNEE AIR BAGS
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE AIR BAGS
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
rThe SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the
injury eduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries t
o front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge
of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure
occupants if they are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
com
plete ejection of v
ehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
● Do no
t mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deplo
yment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
● In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in cer
tain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
● Occupants, including children, who are up against
or v
er
y close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
● Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
● Side Air Bags need r
oom t
o inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
● Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
● Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag cov
ers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will also deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pret
ensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
AIR BAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument P
anel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
52 GETTING T
O KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
IF A DEPLOYMENT OCCURS
The fr
ont air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
● The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants
as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However,
if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
● As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
● Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
● After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
● Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
● Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
● Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from
the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
● Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these o
ther functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
● Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC
Circulation Door
● Cut off battery power to the:
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric Power Steering
○ Brake Booster
○ Electric Park Brake
○ Gear Selector
○ Horn
○ Front Wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle to the START
or ON/OFF position to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle before resetting the system.
If there is no damage to the vehicle's electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, rest the system by
following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
RESET PROCEDURE (EV)
After an event occurs requiring activation of the
Enhanced Accident Response System, when the system
is active, a “Service Electrical System” message will
be displayed on the instrument cluster. The vehicle
is not drivable in this state and must be towed to
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
an authorized dealer immediately to be inspected and
have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
MAINTAINING YOUR AIR BAG SYSTEM
WARNING!
● Modif
ications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it t
o fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
● It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
● Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
ha
v
e access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
● For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1-888-327-4236
● Canadian residents should refer
t
o Transport Canada’s website for
additional information: https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/
services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html
SUMMARY OF
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR RESTRAINING CHILDREN IN VEHICLES
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or w
eight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
INFANT AND CHILD RES
TRAINTS
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children fr
om birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deplo
ying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
OLDER CHILDREN AND CHILD RES
TRAINTS
Children who are tw
o years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing
direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation can lead to failure of an
inf
ant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or
rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before
adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the
vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
● When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
CHILDREN TOO LARGE F
OR BOOSTER SEATS
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the v
ehicle seat while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat
belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching
can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position
the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will no
t protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RECOMMENDA
TIONS FOR ATTACHING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use An
y Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether An-
chor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
LOWER ANCHORS
AND TETHERS FOR
CHILDREN (LATCH) RESTRAINT SYSTEM
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install
the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
LATCH POSITIONS FOR INST
ALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS IN THIS VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing
Child Restraints In This V
ehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LA
TCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint? 65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
toge
ther to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
LOCATING THE LATCH ANCHORA
GES
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Rear LATCH Anchorages
LOCATING
THE UPPER TETHER ANCHORAGES
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat. To access them, locate
the opening in the cloth seatback material directly
below each tether anchorage symbol.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector to
attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten
the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
Rear Tether Strap Anchorages
CENTER SEAT
LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing
mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear
seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. If y
ou are installing
LA
TCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position.
You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the
outboard positions.
Please see
ð
page 60 for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
TO INSTALL A LATCH-COMPATIBLE CHILD
RESTRAINT
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the
seat belt, following the instructions below. See
ð
page 61 to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat
can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for
the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
ð
page 63 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
HOW TO STOW AN UNUSED SWITCHABLE-
ALR SEAT BELT:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation of a child restraint to the
LA
TCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-
fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
INSTALLING CHILD RES
TRAINTS USING THE
VEHICLE SEAT BELT
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead t
o failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● F
ollow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions e
xactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable A
utomatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor
can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked,
the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)”
ð
page 42 for additional information on ALR.
LAP/SHOULDER BELT
SYSTEMS FOR
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS IN THIS
VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the T
ether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
INSTALLING A CHILD R
ESTRAINT WITH A
SWITCHABLE AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead t
o failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second ro
w seat can be reclined,
you may recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to mak
e room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step
5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See
ð
page 63 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INSTALLING CHILD RES
TRAINTS USING THE
TOP TETHER ANCHORAGE:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat, including
the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach
the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the
tether anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See
ð
page 57 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint t
o find the tether
anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may
need to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle
if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, pass the tether strap
around the outboar
d side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
Rear Tether Strap Mounting
4. R
emove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
● An incorrectly anchored te
ther strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injury to
the child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping
control is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the st
eering column, push the control
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the control upward until fully engaged.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving, or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING
STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column control is located below
the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
Use the four
-way control to adjust the steering column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column
t
o sa
ved positions
ð
page 28.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the st
eering column while driving, or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has three temperature settings. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
on the left side of the radio screen or within the
Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button on the top left side of the screen by tapping
the temperature controls, which will provide a quick
drop-down menu containing the controls, or through the
Controls menu of the touchscreen. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the button on the side of the radio, you
can also access the control button through the Climate
menu.
● Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the HI setting on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
● Press the heated st
eering wheel button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The electric motor must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
ð
page 17.
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of adv
anced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions
must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
● Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type and material.
This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system provides increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The
system adapts to different driving conditions. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
64 GETTING TO KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
ð
page 104.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the instrument cluster
display, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service
ð
page 90.
NOTE:
● Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
● If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers
may have occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for
a few moments until the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light and message turn off.
START BUTTON
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ PROPULSION
SYSTEM
This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
Press the Start button to place the vehicle in the
ON/RUN position. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the Start button for Ready to Drive mode.
Start Button
The Star
t butt
on can be placed in the following modes:
OFF
● The electric motor is stopped.
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available.
ON/RUN
● Electric mo
t
or is ON.
● All electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows, climate controls, heated seats, etc.).
READY TO DRIVE
● The electric motor will start (when foot is on the
brake pedal).
NOTE:
If the Start button does not change the mode by
pushing the Start button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method
can be used to operate the Start button. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
against the Start button and push to operate the Start
button.
WARNING!
● When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
f
ob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Propulsion
System in the ON/RUN position. A child could
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
WARNING!
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Alwa
ys remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
● When opening the driver's door with the v
ehicle in
the ON/RUN position, a chime will sound to remind
you to place the vehicle in the OFF position. In
addition to the chime, the message will display
“Accessory On” in the cluster.
● For more information on proper electric motor
starting procedures, see
ð
page 132.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
DESCRIPTION
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
1 — Tap For Mist Or Hold For Washer
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
R
otate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation, or to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from re
turning to the park
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the park position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four int
ermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions permit. At driving speeds above
10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles (f
irst detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth
detent). If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16
km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several cycles after the end of the lever
is released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are
in the off position, the wipers will operate for several
cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Tap the end of the lever to operate the MIST function of
the wiper system.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The washer function must be used in order
to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
ð
page 212.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the multifunction lever to one of four detent positions
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay detent position four is the
most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for normal
rain conditions.
NOTE:
● The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
● The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
● Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
● The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for
the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under
the following conditions:
● Low Ambient Temperature — When the power button
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater
than 32°F (0°C).
● Gear Box In NEUTRAL Position — When the power
button is ON, and the gear box is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
● Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch contr
ols the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights,
instrument panel lights, and interior lights.
Headlight Switch
1 — Headlight On/Off Button
2 — AUTO Headlight Control
3 — Daytime Running Lights
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada have headlights that will be
deactivated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime Running
Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with the front and
rear marker lights. The DRLs may be deactivated when
the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, press the Headlight On
button. When the headlight button is pressed, the
parking lights, taillights, license plate light, instrument
panel lights, as well as side mirror and side marker
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
press the headlight control button, the DRLs will remain
illuminated.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to
stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different
lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
● To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
st
eel w
ool or other abrasiv
e materials to clean the
lenses.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction le
ver is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAY
TIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights are activated with the
switch in the AUTO position and in daylight conditions.
The Daytime Running Lights may be deactivated y
applying the parking brake.
NOTE:
● If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
● On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side),
or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard
warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LO
W BEAM SWIT
CH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The
multifunction lever will return to the centered position.
To return the headlights to low beam, pull or push the
multifunction lever.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of
a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview
mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
● The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto
High Beam” within Uconnect Settings, pushing the
multifunction lever toward the instrument panel into
the high beam position, as well as by pressing the
AUTO button
ð
page 104.
● Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the
vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on
the windshield or camera lens will cause the system
to function improperly.
● If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-
aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local
authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. The vehicle defaults
to AUTO whenever the vehicle is turned on and will
be illuminated. To turn the system on, press the AUTO
button. When the system is on, the headlight time
delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the power
button in the OFF position. The headlight time delay
can be programmed up to 90 seconds within Uconnect
Settings
ð
page 104.
To turn the automatic system off, press any other
button on the headlight switch bank.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be on before the headlights will come
on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights, marker lights, and
instrument panel lights, press the headlight control
button. To turn off the parking lights, press the
headlight control button a second time. The head light
control will default back to the AUTO position.
68 GETTING TO KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS O
N WITH WIPERS —
IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights,
it also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
electric motor is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
ð
page
104.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the
lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON APPROACH
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door handle
pocket lights (if equipped), and interior lights will
illuminate when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed as the operator is approaching the vehicle. This
feature can be turned on/off, and the length of time
the headlights stay on can be programmed for up to 90
seconds within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 104.
Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
This feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect
system, and is activated when the operator approaches
the driver’s door, passenger’s door, or hatchback
with a valid key fob on their person. Some exterior
and interior lights will illuminate in order to provide
an increased sense of welcome and security as the
operator approaches the vehicle in the dark. “Headlight
Illumination On Approach” must be selected and set to
a time value other than zero within Uconnect Settings
for Pr
oximity Wake-Up to activate.
The doors may be locked or unlocked for this feature
to activate, as long as the power button is in the OFF
position, or during a Remote Start event. It will not
activate if the doors are locked and the power button
was placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the following
conditions:
● After numerous consecutive activations, in order to
conserve the vehicle’s battery
● After the vehicle’s electric motor has been off for
several days
Headlight Animation — If Equipped
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is turned
on, and set to a time value above zero, the exterior
lights illuminate in a theatrical manner during approach
to the vehicle. This feature is activated in the following
situations:
● Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated
● Remote Climate Control is activated
● The unlock button on the key fob is pushed
NOTE:
For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote Start
or with the push of the unlock button, “Greeting Lights”
must also be selected within the Uconnect system.
HEADLIGHT DELA
Y
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the power button is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch
is cycled off. Headlight delay can be canceled by either
turning the headlight switch on then off, or by placing
the power button in the ON position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 104.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the
vehicle is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will
chime when the driver’s door is opened.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner reading light buttons. The light brightness can be
controlled with the dimmer switch. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
1 — Driver Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Passenger Reading Light On/Off Button
3 — Dome Defeat Button
4 — Dome ON Button
FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the
overhead console.
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on
either side of the console. These buttons are backlit
for nighttime visibility. To turn the lights off, push the
switch a second time. The lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
DIMMER CONTROL
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting and
lighted cupholders (if equipped) can be regulated
by rotating the left dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the instrument cluster
display, radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to the first detent up until you hear a click. This
feature is useful when headlights are required during
the day. Rotating the dimmer control up to the second
detent, the farthest position up, turns on the courtesy
lights regardless if the doors are opened or closed.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
ATTITUDE A
DJUSTMENT LIGHTING — I
F
EQUIPPED
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the
vehicle can be selected within the Apps menu on the
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the power button is in the OFF
position and any door is left open or the dimmer control
is rotated all the way up to the dome light on position,
the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the power button is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the power button
is placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes
while the power button is OFF, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
DESCRIPTION
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
front doors are opened, or when the dimmer control
is rotated to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle
is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock
button is pushed on the key fob, the courtesy and
dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all
the way down, to the O (off) detent, all of the interior
lights will turn off. This allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the
vehicle’s battery.
radio screen, or within Uconnect Settings
ð
page
104. Brightness is adjusted using the ambient light
dimmer control on the headlight switch.
64 colors can be selected for the instrument panel
decorative ambient lights.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will
remain white, and the ambient light dimmer control
switch will adjust all ambient lighting at the same time.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Scan this QR code to learn more
about HomeLink® (Garage Door
Opener).
● HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitter
s that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered
by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
● The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
● To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with
each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
● The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active
ð
page 259.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held
transmitter is programmed to activate the device you
are tr
ying to pr
ogram your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the power button in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A ROLLING
CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the power button in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3
inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want
to program while you push and hold the garage
door opener transmitter button you are trying to
replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling
code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
PROGRAMMING HOME
LINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
ð
page 72.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code,
or non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be performed
72 GETTING TO KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
multiple times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK®
BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the power button in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the electric motor.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step
2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the power button in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Propulsion System, place the power button in
the RUN position. Make sure while programming
HomeLink® with the electric motor on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink®
has successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly
when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It
may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases.
The garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
● If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage door/
device should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pushed.
● To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the power button in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If y
ou are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
● Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
● Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
● Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
y
ou are pr
ogramming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
INTERIOR STORAGE AND FEATURES
GLO
VE COMPARTMENT
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glo
ve compartment, pull the release
handle.
The glove compartment can be locked using the
emergency key within the key fob.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glo
v
e
compartment open may result in injury in a collision.
DOOR STORAGE
Large st
orage areas are built into the door panels for
easy access.
CONSOLE FEATURES
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, the lo
wer storage
area is made for larger items, like tissue boxes. In
addition, a 12 Volt power outlet is located here.
Center Console Lower Storage Area
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving with
the console compartment lid open may result in
injury in a collision.
SUNGLASSES BIN DOOR
At the fr
ont of the console a compartment is provided
for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push
the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome
pad on the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
USB
/A
UX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
Front USB Ports
Located on the rear of the fr
ont center console are
dual USB charge only ports. The USB charge only
ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when
connected.
Rear USB Charging Ports
NOTE:
● The USB Media Hub has a safety feature that will
turn off the USBs in case of electric surges. When
this happens, the USB ports will not be functional. To
reset the Media Hub, reset the radio by pressing and
holding the Power button for 15-20 seconds.
● Charge unsupported devices with the charge only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by the
system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either
a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet
is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol
are powered when the vehicle is ON, while the outlets
labeled with a battery symbol are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not inser
t any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
CAUTION!
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The power outlet is located inside the storage area in
the center console.
Power Outlet
If the Media Hub is in use, do not e
xceed the maximum
power of 100 W (8 Amp) for the center console power
outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use, the outlet
can deliver up to 160 W (13 Amp). If the power rating
is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system needs to be
replaced.
NOTE:
The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to battery powered
all the times by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from
“IGN” to “B+”
ð
page 215. These fuses are found
within the rear power distribution center located in the
hatchback of the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
● Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the vehicle from starting.
● Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
● After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
● Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage.
WIRELESS CHARGING
PAD — IF EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your v
ehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi®
wireless charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi®
wireless charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve
or a specialized back plate can be purchased from your
mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer.
Please see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
76 GETTING T
O KNO
W YOUR VEHICLE
LED Indicator Status:
● No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device, or Device may not be compatible with the Qi
®
standard.
● Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
● Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign object is
detected.
● Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
● The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
● The Start button must be in the ON/RUN position
and all doors are closed in order for the phone to
charge.
● To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or hatch is opened, even if the electric motor is
running.
● Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
● Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
● If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
● Some phone's pr
o
tective case may impact charging.
If a phone is not charging due to thick or not
certified phone case, it is recommended to remove
the phone case before placing on the wireless
charging pad.
● iPhones
®
equipped with Magsafe
®
may affect the
charging function, and may cause higher phone
temperature.
● Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad
so that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
● Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging may cause the phone to overheat
and will reduce the charging rate, and may even
shut down an application that is actively running (i.e.
Android Auto
™
or Apple CarPlay
®
).
● The charging rate may slow down or stop to prevent
the phone from overheating. If this happens, it
does not mean there is a fault with the wireless
charging pad. This may just be a protective measure
requested by the phone to prevent damage.
● The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay®, Android
Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In
this case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
● Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object in the phone case or near the
wireless charging pad.
● T
o protect your phone from overheating, the wireless
charging pad is equipped with an integrated cooling
fan.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging
pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can
cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob.
Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
To prevent malfunction or burns:
● Do not insert any metallic or magnetic materials
(such as Coins, Keys, Metal Cards, Paper Clips) or
Key Card between the charging pad and the phone
while charging.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials (such
as aluminum sticker) to the device side placing the
charging area.
HATCH
OPENING THE HAT
CH
The hatch may be opened in several ways:
● Power hatch release button on the overhead
console.
● Hatch button on the key fob
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
● Hatch Passive Entry button
ð
page 22
NO
TE:
Without a key in proximity behind the hatch, the
passive entry hatch release button will only release
the hatch latch when the vehicle is unlocked.
With the power button in the ON/RUN position, the
hatch open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the hatch is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the hatch is closed.
With the power button in the OFF position, the hatch
open symbol will display until the hatch is closed.
Power Hatch Release Button
The hatch can be opened from inside
the vehicle using the power hatch release
button located on the overhead console.
Power Hatch Release Button
NO
TE:
The gear select
or must be in PARK before the button
will operate.
Key Fob Hatch Release Button
Push the power hatch button on the key
fob twice within five seconds to release the
hatch.
Passive Entry Button
Push the hatch passive entry button which is located on
the right side of the hatch lid. This button will release
the hatch when the vehicle is unlocked, or when the
vehicle is locked and a valid passive entry key fob is
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the hatch.
Hatch Passive Entry Button
Adjusting The Height Of The Hatch
Use the f
ollowing steps to set a new default height for
opening the hatch.
1. With the hatch open, manually set the height of
the open hatch to the desired position.
2. Hold the close hatch button for three seconds to
set the position as the vehicles new fully open
height.
CLOSING THE H
ATCH
There are three ways to close the hatch:
● Manually (grab the hatch closing handle and pull
downward)
● Close Hatch button in the cargo area
● Overhead console button (Must be pressed twice
within five seconds)
NOTE:
The hatch cannot be closed using the key fob.
Close Hatch Button
NOTE:
Before closing the hatch lid, make sure your key fob
is not inside the hatch area. The hatch will latch then
automatically unlock if the key fob is detected, not
allowing the key fob to be locked in the hatch area.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HATCH SAFETY
Hatch Malfunction Pr
ocedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the hatch,
the hatch can be released by accessing the service
release feature in the latch. This can be done
using a 3 mm diameter screwdriver.
Hatch Emergency Release
2. F
rom inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. Place
the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever
and release the latch.
4. If hatch is left open for an extended period of time,
the hatch may need to be closed manually to reset
power hatch functionality.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
The load floor is designed for a maximum load of 187
lb (84 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the
load floor.
Additional storage can be found under the storage lid.
T
o access the lo
wer storage, lift the handle and raise
the storage lid.
Lift Load Floor Handle
NOTE:
When the lif
tgate is opened the rear cargo light will
illuminate.
Foldable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Locate the cargo cover in the cargo area, unfold
using a twisting motion.
2. Identify the bottom of the cargo cover by locating
the labels on the left and right cargo cover pins.
3. With the bottom facing down, hook the straps
t
o the inside posts near the outboar
d rear head
restraint on each side.
Step 3
4. Inser
t the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots on each side of the hatch.
Step 4
NOTE:
The hatch may be opened with the cargo cover in place.
To store the foldable cargo area cover, reverse the
installation steps.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
To fold the cargo cover, see the following illustration:
Folding The Cargo Cover
1 — With your left hand, grasp the upper left corner
and with y
our right hand, grasp the ov
er the top of the
lower right pin.
2 — Twist Cover Twice
3 — Push Twisted Cover Inward
4 — Cover Will Remain Folded For Storage
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop
and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the
cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area sides,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving. The cargo tie downs are designed for a
maximum load of 300 lb (136 kg) per tie-down.
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
● Cargo tie-downs are not saf
e anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
● To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING!
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
● Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door
or left door center pillar.
● Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
● Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
● Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or accident.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
WARNING!
EV Models Only
● Alw
ays place the star
t button in the OFF position
before opening the hood.
● Some areas remain very hot for a while after
driving or charging and may cause serious burns if
touched.
(Continued)
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● K
eep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
fr
om the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The cooling fan may start operating at any
time, including during charging. Hands or clothing
caught in a rotating fan may cause serious injury.
To open the hood:
The Hood Release butt
on is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel. Press the hood
release button once to open the hood.
Hood Release Button
NOTE:
● V
ehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
● While lifting the hood, use both hands.
● Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
In The Event Of A Power Failure
The hood ma
y also be manually released in the e
vent
of a depleted battery. The mechanical release lever is
located under the drivers side of the instrument panel.
Emergency Hood Release Location
1 — Lock
2 — Hood Release Pull Strap
To open, unlock the emergency release door by turning
the lock mechanism a quar
ter turn with a small tool
such as a coin. Then pull the emergency release strap
two times to release the hood.
Be sure to replace the strap and close lid by securing
the lock mechanism once the mechanical release is no
longer needed.
CLOSING THE H
OOD
Some models may not be equipped with a headliner. In
all models, be careful when lowering the hood as to not
cause damage. Close the hood by following these steps:
Hand Placement Zone
1.
In one continuous motion, gently lower the hood
until it is resting on the latch mechanism.
2. Place two hands on center of hood, above the
latch mechanism. Press down firmly until hood is
latched.
3. Confirm hood is latched in place.
CAUTION!
● Do not drop or forcefully close hood. Doing so can
cause damage t
o the hood.
● Only use force on the areas highlighted in the
image above. Pressing down on areas outside of
this area can cause damage.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
FRUNK SAFET
Y — IF EQUIPPED
Frunk Load Specifications
Do not exceed a load more than 60 lbs (27 kg) in the
frunk.
CAUTION!
Do not place liquids or anything that can melt in the
frunk storage com
partment.
Hood Emergency Release
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the frunk, the hood can be opened by pressing the
Emergency Release button inside the frunk.
The hood can only be opened if the vehicle is in the
PARK position.
Frunk Emergency Release
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the frunk,
either b
y climbing int
o the frunk from outside. Always
close the hood when your vehicle is unattended.
Once in the frunk, young children may not be able
to escape. If trapped in the frunk, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Depending on your vehicle’s trim level, features and options may vary.
10.25 INCH INSTR
UMENT CLUSTER
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 83
3
16 INCH INSTR
UMENT CLUSTER
84 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
Scan this QR code to learn more
about your digital cluster.
1. Charge/Power Gauge
● Purple indicates the amount of energy utilized
to charge the battery while slowing the vehicle.
● Red fill indicates the amount of power currently
being utilized from the high voltage battery to
propel the vehicle.
Charge/Power Gauge
2. Main Menu Area
● Displa
ys Main Menu items and information.
3. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Max Regeneration
● Indicat
es number of regen le
vels available.
Regenerative braking replenishes the vehicle's
high voltage battery during deceleration.
5. Battery Gauge
● Indicates battery percentage. The icon and
bargraph change color according to the
charging status and level. The arrow next to the
battery icon indicates what side of the vehicle
the charge port is on.
NOTE:
Some telltales illuminate for a bulb check when the
vehicle is first turned ON.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Depending on your vehicle’s trim level, features and
options may vary.
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the vehicle in the OFF position, opening/closing
of a door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer.
Your instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s systems
and features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster displa
y features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display And Controls Location
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 85
3
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
6 — Layout Button
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Use the left or right arrow button to cycle through
the Main Menu items.
U
p And Down Arrow Buttons:
Use the up
or do
wn
arrow button to cycle through
the submenus of the Main Menu it
ems.
NO
TE:
● Holding the up
or down or left or right
arrow button will continuously loop through the
currently selected menu or options presented on the
screen.
● Upon returning to a Main Menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that Main Menu will be
displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer in Driver Info Menu:
● Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup in Settings Menu:
● OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
● Within each submenu layer, the up
and down
arrow buttons will allow the user to select the item of
interest.
● Pushing the
OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user
to the first page of the submenu).
● The left or right arrow buttons navigate to the
adjacent menus.
Layout Button:
Press the Layout button on the steering wheel to toggle
between the available cluster layout options. Selected
layout will continue to be displayed at next key cycle.
● Classic: default layout characterized by analog
circular gauges and Main Menu.
● Center: characterized by a centered speedometer
and no Main Menu bar.
● Navigation: characterized by navigation map and
control in cluster.
Selectable Main Menu Items
Push and release the lef
t
or right arrow button
until the desired Main Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Follow the menu or submenu prompts as desired.
DRIVER INFO
The Driver Info menu consists of the following
submenus: Driver Assist, Trip A, and Speedometer.
Driver Assist - If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the current status of
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active Lane Management
(ALM), and Active Driving Assist (ADA) , if equipped.
Trip A
The Trip menu displays trip distance, average speed,
travel time, and an instantaneous consumption graph
with average indication. The cluster will show "- -" in
place of value for trip consumption or trip distance
if the cluster does not receive a signal. Hold the OK
button to reset all information in Trip A.
Speedometer
Push the OK button to toggle between speed units
(km/h or mph).
AUDIO
This menu provides current audio information or phone
information when applicable.
86 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
HEAD-UP DISPLAY (HUD) - IF EQUIPPED
The Head-Up Displa
y menu has the following options:
● Display On/Off
● Content & Layout
○ Standard
○ Simple
○ Advanced (Default)
● Height (1-10)
● Brightness (1-10)
MESSAGES
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages, if any. Push the up or down arrow button
to scroll through the stored messages. Number of
messages is indicated by the dots on the screen.
When there are no messages or only one message, no
submenu dots or arrows will appear.
SETTINGS MENU
Push and release the left
or right arrow button
until the Settings Menu displa
ys. Use the up
or
down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenus.
Use the OK button to select.
Speed Warning - If Equipped
When set, provides a visual and audible warning when
vehicle exceeds customer set speed. Set speed will
appear within telltale. When the set speed is exceeded,
a single chime will sound with a message "Speed
Warning Exceeded".
To set speed warning, press the OK button to enter
the Speed Warning submenu. Press the down arrow to
scroll to Speed Warning On. Edit Speed will be available
once turned on. Use the up or down arrow buttons to
set limit. Press the OK button to set the speed. If you
exit the menu without selecting OK, the Speed Warning
will return to its previous status.
Screen Setup
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location of that information.
● Upper Left: Compass, Outside Temp, Time (Default),
or None
● Upper Right: Compass, Outside Temp (Default),
Time, or None
● Restore Defaults
NOTE:
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status, some features may not be available.
DRIVE EXPERIENCE RECORDER (DXR) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
P
er
formance Features is intended for off-highway or
track use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features
be used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
(Continued)
WARNING!
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Push and release the right or left arrow button
until the DXR menu is displayed. Push and release the
up or down arrow button to enter the submenus.
This feature is una
vailable in Valet Mode.
● Drag Race
● Circuit/Rally
○ Race < Track Name >
○ Create Track
○ Select Track
PERFORMANCE FEATURES
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
P
er
formance Features is intended for off-highway or
track use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features
be used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 87
3
Push and release the right or left arrow button
until the Performance menu is displayed.
Push the up or down arrow button to enter the
submenus.
The Per
formance Features include the following:
● Speed Timers (Best, Last, Recent)
○ 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Speed Timer
○ 0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) Speed Timer
● Drag Timers (Best, Recent, Reaction Time)
● Lap Timer
● Braking Distance
○ Distance
○ From Speed
● G-Forces
○ Peak Values
● Top Speed
● Motor Power
○ HP
○ kW
VEHICLE INFO
Push and release the right
or left arrow button
until the Vehicle Inf
o menu is displayed. Push and
release the up
or down arrow button to scroll
through the submenus. F
ollow the directional prompts
to access or reset any of the submenu items.
● Energy Economy: pr
ovides a real-time indicator
of instant consumption compared to average
consumption. Hold the OK button to reset average
energy economy. For invalid or no signals, the values
may display two dashes "- -".
● Tire Pressure Monitor: displays units psi, kPa, or
bar based on selection. Pressure for individual tires
indicated. For invalid or no signals, the tire pressure
value will show "- -" and "Tire Pressure Unavailable".
Turtle Mode
This mode is triggered when there is a low estimated
range to empty that will disable some functionalities
and limit vehicle speed/torque in order to save battery
and allow the driver to reach a charging station. There
are four levels with pop-up warning messages.
The Speed Override Warning Light will
appear only in Levels 3 and 4 when the
driver exceeds the Turtle Mode imposed
limited speed.
Turtle Mode Message Levels 1 and 2
Turtle Mode Message Levels 3 and 4
Stop Saf
ely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon
Stop Safely Vehicle Will
Shut Off Soon W
arning Message
This warning will be displayed on the instrument panel
display when the vehicle has determined an operational
issue will occur shortly, which will cause the vehicle's
propulsion system to turn off. If this message appears
while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location as
88 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
soon as possible. Have the vehicle transported to an
authorized dealer.
● This is a high priority message
● This message will be displayed continuously
● Cannot be cleared with button press
● A single chime will sound continuously
Fire Danger! Pull Over Now! Exit Vehicle!
Fire Danger! Pull Over Now!
Exit Vehicle! Warning Message
A w
arning will appear on the instrument panel display
if the system detects the high voltage battery has
overheated. This can result in a vehicle fire, and the
release of toxic and/or flammable gases. To reduce
the risk of a larger fire, the vehicle’s high voltage
propulsion system will turn off within thirty seconds of
displaying this warning. At that time, the vehicle may
not accelerate. You can still steer and brake the vehicle.
This high priority message:
● displays continuously.
● cannot be cleared with a button press.
● has a rapid and continuous chime.
Stop and park the vehicle in an open area. Have all
passengers exit the vehicle as soon as possible and
move to a safe distance away from the vehicle. After
all passengers safely exit the vehicle, call emergency
responders immediately. Even if you do not see flames,
a fire may start at any moment. Do not attempt to
reenter or start the vehicle.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating,
electrical load reduction actions will take place to
extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle.
This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-
essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the vehicle is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk of
battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart
after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
stat
e of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rat
e that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
● The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
● If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
ð
page 92.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected
by load reduction:
● Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
● Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
● Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
● HVAC System
● 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
● Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
● The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because the
electrical loads are larger than the capability of
the charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
● Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC,
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 89
3
USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city
driving, towing, frequent stopping).
● Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar devices.
● Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
● The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
● The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
● The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
● The battery was used for an extended period
with the motor not running to supply radio, lights,
chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
● Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
● Check if an
y aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and power button on draw currents).
● Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
● The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event
of a failure indication. All active telltales will display
first if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not
appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
two to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the power button is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Active Driving Assist - Driver
Inattentiveness Warning Light
This light illuminates when driver
inattentiveness has been continually
detected, warning the driver to place their
hands on the steering wheel.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem
is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
90 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the power button from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately four seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the power button in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem
is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by changing the power button from the OFF position
to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the power button in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 91
3
Brakes Overheated Warning Light
This indicator light illuminat
es along with
a message to indicate the brake rotor
temperature has exceeded its set threshold,
second stage. Stop safely and place the
vehicle in PARK.
Low Voltage Battery Charge Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
low voltage battery is not charging properly.
If it stays on, there may be a malfunction
with the low voltage charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Battery Charge Low Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate and a
message will display when the high-voltage
battery charge level is low. Some systems
may be disabled to save battery. This mode
is triggered when the vehicle has a low estimated range
and a warning message will appear on the screen.
Navigate to the nearest approved charging station.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminat
e when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Drowsy Driver Detection Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) system
monitors certain vehicle movements and
driver interactions to identify patterns
suggesting drowsiness. If detected, the
system sends the driver an auditory and visual signal
to take precaution. A pop-up will display continuously
until the driver presses the OK button to clear.
Drowsy Driver Alert can be turned on or off through
Uconnect Settings
ð
page 109.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
ð
page 64.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electric Motor Failure Warning Light
This light alerts the driv
er that there is a
failure in the Electric Propulsion System.
Contact an authorized dealer if illumination
persists.
Service Electrical System Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
service to the electrical system is needed.
It will be accompanied by a message in the
cluster. If the telltale stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Hatch Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hatch
is open or not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
92 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminat
e when a
plug status fault is detected (when vehicle
not in motion). It will be accompanied by a
cluster message indicating the type of fault.
You may receive one of the following messages if a fault
is detected:
● “Service Charging System” – If you see this
message, it is recommended to unplug and plug in
again, or try a different charging station. If an issue
continues, contact an authorized dealer to service
your high voltage charging system.
● “Issue Detected Check External Charging Station” –
If you see this message, the charging station may be
powered off, having internal fault or being scheduled
to charge later. It is recommended to try a different
charging station. If an issue continues, then contact
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Older or non-compliant J1772 EVSE models may
not support charging of this vehicle. If this vehicle
does not charge, it may be connected to a non-
compliant Level 2 EVSE, and will flash indicators.
Please identify this failure to the site operator and/or
EVSE provider.
● Before this vehicle can be driven, the EVSE Charging
Cord must be disconnected from the vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the power button is first placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and
the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
ð
page 37.
Speed Override Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn
the driver that the vehicle speed is being
limited. The purpose of this feature is to
help save battery allowing the driver to
reach the nearest charging station. The indicator will
appear each time the limit is exceeded. A speed
override popup message will appear when the speed
is first exceeded.
This mode is triggered when the vehicle has extremely
low or no remaining estimated range. Navigate to the
nearest approved charging station.
Turtle Mode Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
that Turtle Mode has been activated and
that some vehicle systems may be disabled
to save battery. The purpose of this feature
is help the driver reach the nearest charging station.
This mode is triggered when the vehicle has a low
estimated range and a warning message will appear on
the screen. Navigate to the nearest approved charging
station.
Traction Battery Failure Warning Light
This light alerts the driv
er that there is
a failure in the Traction Battery System.
Contact an authorized dealer if illumination
persists.
High Voltage Coolant Low Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
that high voltage battery coolant is low.
Contact an authorized dealer if illumination
persists.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the power button
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 93
3
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the vehicle is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Active Driving Assist - Driver
Inattentiveness Warning Light
This light illuminates when driver
inattentiveness has been detected, warning
the driver to place their hands on the
steering wheel.
Active Lane Management Warning Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning Light
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is crossing
the lane marker
ð
page 164.
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS)
Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the AVAS
system is not functioning properly. If the
light stays on contact and authorized dealer
for service.
Brakes Overheated Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates when the
brake rotor temperature has exceeded its
set threshold, first stage. Avoid extended
brake use.
Creep Fail Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminat
e when
there is a fault within the Creep system or if
the Creep system is unable to be turned off.
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsy Driver Detected (DDD) system is
not operating correctly and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
e-Coast/Regenerative Braking
Unavailable Warning Light
This light appears along with a message
when regenerative braking is unavailable
because of a system failure. This indicates a
fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the power button is placed in the
ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the electric motor running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the motor
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
key cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
● The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the power
button is placed in the ON/RUN position.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
● This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the power button is turned to ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it
was turned off previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
94 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Service Active Lane Management
Warning Light — If Eq
uipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not
operating and requires service. Please see
an authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light
This light will turn on when ACC is not
operating and needs service
ð
page 181.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the Forward Collision Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer for
service
ð
page 155.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and energy consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces energy efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
w
arning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants
may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 95
3
Traction Battery Cut-Off Warning Light —
If Equipped
This t
elltale will turn on to indicate the
Traction Battery system is not functioning
properly. Contact an authorized dealer if
illumination persists.
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to indicate a TSR
fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
light remains on after restarting the vehicle.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
ð
page 155.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Drive Mode - ECO Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Eco mode is
active.
E-Coast Available Indicator Light
This indicator light turns green when
regenerativ
e braking is available and able
to capture energy.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs
ð
page 164.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
ð
page 67.
Plug Status Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate green
when the vehicle is plugged in and the
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE)
charging plug is securely attached to the
charging port. This indicates that the plug is detected,
but doesn't mean it is charging. It will be accompanied
with a cluster message indicating the charge status:
● “Plugged In And Charging”
● “Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set
Schedule”
● “Plugged in and Charging Complete”
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
PowerShot Activated Indicator Light
This light will turn on when PowerShot is
activated. Maximum acceleration will be
available for a limited period of time.
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle has enough power to be
driven, regardless of the speed of the
vehicle.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
● A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
● Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
96 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Po
werShot Unavailable Indicator Light
This light will turn on when PowerShot
is unavailable and prepping. The time for
which this feature is unavailable depends
on prepping factors.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Driving Assist Indicator Light
This light illuminates when Active Driving
Assist is active.
Creep Off Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
Creep is turned off.
Drive Mode - Auto Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when Auto
drive mode is active.
Drive Mode - Custom Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Custom drive mode is active.
Drive Mode - Drag Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when Drag
drive mode is active.
Drive Mode - Sport Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
Sport drive mode is active.
Drive Mode - Track Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
Track drive mode is active.
Drive Mode - Wet/Snow Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when Wet/
Snow drive mode is active.
Valet Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when Valet
mode is active.
e-Coast Unavailable Indicator Light
This indicator light is white when regen-
erative braking is unavailable because the
battery is currently at 100% state of charge.
This is normal and does not indicate a fault.
This light will turn on when PowerShot is
enabled and ready to use.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicat
or Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front
of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams
are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 97
PowerShot Indicator Light
3
CLIMATE CONTROLS
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 12.3-inch
Display Aut
omatic Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit. In MAX A/C, the blower level and
mode position can be adjusted to the desired user
settings. Pressing other settings will cancel MAX A/C.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button to change
the current se
tting. The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator illuminates when
Recirculation is on. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience
for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
Auto Button/Auto Eco Button
Press and release the Auto/AutoEco but-
ton to toggle between Auto and AutoEco.
This activates the comfort settings to au-
tomatically control the front driver and
passenger area’s comfort by adjusting
distribution and the amount of airflow.
When the AutoEco button is selected, the
climate system will be controlled to opti-
mize for energy savings, but comfort may
be compromised.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defr
ost button
on the touchscreen to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the
climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button
on the touchscreen or the button under
the touchscreen to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
98 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up
And Down Butt
ons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the touchscreen
or press and slide the temperature
bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. There is a button below the touchscreen that
operates in the same way.
Push the blue button on the touchscreen
or press and slide the temperature
bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings. There is a button below the touchscreen that
operates in the same way.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC butt
on on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The
SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC
is on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Touchscreen
Blower can also be manipulated by sliding the blower
bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change
the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outle
ts in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
slider located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 99
3
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
t
ouchscreen or the button on the panel
below the touchscreen to turn the Climate
Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You
will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
● It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
● The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units within Uconnect Settings
ð
page 104.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
● “Set the driver temperature to [Desired Temperature]
degrees ”
● “Set the passenger temperature to [Desired
Temperature] degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For inf
ormation on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
ð
page 248.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
100 DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (MAX A/C) on,
and blow
er on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather Turn
(A/C) on and set the
mode control t
o
(Panel
Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid Con-
ditions
Set the mode control to (Mix
Mode) and turn on
(A/C) to
k
eep windo
ws clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield fog-
ging starts to occur, move the
control to (Mix Mode).
DASHBOARD INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 101
3
INFOTAINMENT
INTRODUCTION
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO
Your vehicle is equipped with the Uconnect 5 NAV With
12.3-inch Display. For detailed information, refer to your
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
● Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
● At vehicle start up, there may be a delay in certain
features such as Android Auto
™
and Apple CarPlay®.
RADIO OPERATION, MOBILE PHONES,
AND CYBERSECURITY
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on
in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within
the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using the
Uconnect system.
Regulatory And Safety Information
US/CANADA
Exposure t
o Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted
in some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
ð
page 259.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features t
o reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
ð
page 255, or refer to your Radio Instruction
Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y insert trusted media devices/components
int
o your vehicle. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software, and
if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
● As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help fur
ther improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of
a security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
102 INFOTAINMENT
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls - On Back Of Wheel
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will mute
the system.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you
are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will switch between the various modes available (AM/
FM/SXM [if equipped], etc.).
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
In Media Mode, Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, or
streaming music, the Center button on the Steering
Wheel Audio Controls does not function. Nothing will
happen when that button is pressed.
NOTE:
While the radio turns on, it may take time to establish a
connection between Satellites and Phones. There may
be a minute or two delay when the Steering Wheel
Audio Controls will not responds as the radio initializes.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
Introducing Voice R
ecognition
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s
Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Basic Voice Commands
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
or say the vehicle’s Wake Up
word “Hey Uconnect”. The factory default Wake Up word
is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
● “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
● “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
● “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
Get Started
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition syst
em. You can also use the
system’s Wake Up word to activate voice recognition.
The Wake Up word can be set through the Uconnect
Settings.
INFOTAINMENT 103
4
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
● Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
● Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
● Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command.
● You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have voice recognition buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® by initiating a Siri or Google Assistant voice
recognition session. Depending on your device, you may
need to press and hold the VR button for one second to
begin a voice recognition session.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send
Or R
eceiv
e A Text
2 — Push To End Call
Additional Information
© 2024 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Description
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons
on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate
located on the center of the instrument panel. These
buttons allow you to access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can vary by
vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 12.3-inch
Display Butt
ons On The Touchscreen
104 INFOTAINMENT
To access the Uconnect Settings press the Vehicle
button on the menu bar, then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen.
In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
● All settings should be changed when the vehicle is
ON.
● Only one area of the touchscreen may be selected at
a time.
When making a selection, press one button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE:
Availability of settings, setting names, and menu
options can vary depending on vehicle features,
equipped Uconnect system, and the currently installed
software.
DISPLAY
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
av
ailable settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has
the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of
the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be
set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
INFOTAINMENT 105
4
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Nighttime This setting will allow you to adjust the nighttime brightness setting. Selectable options are 1 to 10
Display Brightness Daytime This setting will allow you to adjust the daytime brightness setting. Selectable options are 1 to 10
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (mph or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Current Consumption” (mpg [US], mpg [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or
°F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually
closed.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Ups Displayed with Button Press This setting will turn message notifications on or off.
Display Sync This setting will enable Display Sync.
106 INFOTAINMENT
MY PROFILE
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
English, Italiano, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with the
radio display.
Display Brightness Daytime
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is daytime. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Nighttime
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is nighttime. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (mph or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Current Consumption” (mpg [US], mpg [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or
°F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
INFOTAINMENT 107
4
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be Off for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is “Hey Uconnect”.
Voice Barge-in
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off. For more information about Voice Barge-in, refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut off. The available options are “0 sec”,
“45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off with Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time is reached. The available
settings are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
108 INFOTAINMENT
Setting Name Description
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for further
information.
Auto-On Comfort
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or vehicle started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting
will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems
whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu containing the audio settings
ð
page 119.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
SAFETY/ASSISTANCE
When the Safety/Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending
on the features eq
uipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available
options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic
Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW
system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
INFOTAINMENT 109
4
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In
Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have
the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have
the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an
object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver by vibrating the steering wheel and/or moving the steering wheel, when a lane departure
is detected. The available options within Active Lane Management are Lane Management “Vibration Only”, “Steering
Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”; Lane Warning “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”; Vibration Strength; and
Steering Assist Strength.
Automatic Emergency Braking
This setting will take you to the selectable options for “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” and “Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity”.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Rear Seat Alert
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the vehicle is running or if the vehicle is turned on
within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and
“Visual + Chime”.
New Speed Zone Indication
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has changed in an area. The available
options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
ParkSense
This setting will allow you to change the ParkSense system. The avaialble options are "Only Warning" or "Warning + Active
Braking".
ParkSense Based Camera activation This setting will allow you to enable or disable the parksense camera when an obstacle is detected.
Front Park Assist Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
110 INFOTAINMENT
Setting Name Description
Rear Park Assist Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are “Off”, “Sound Only”, and “Sound &
Display”.
Drowsy Driver Alert
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting
will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights
& Chime” setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default
This setting will change the Electric Power Steering mode. The available options are “Comfort” for a lower effort steering
experience, “Normal” for the standard effort steering experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering experience.
Paddle Shifters This setting will turn the Paddle Shifters on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
EV SOUND/DRIVE THEME
When the EV Sound button or the Drive Theme button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to EV sounds.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
EV Sound This setting will activate or deactivate the EV sound for a different driving experience.
INFOTAINMENT 111
4
Setting Name Description
Display Sync - Drive Theme Menu Only This setting will activate or deactivate the Display Sync.
EV Sound Type This setting will allow the user to choose what type of sound the vehicle replicates.
CLOCK & TIME
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll through the available days,
months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available options are “On” and “Off”.
112 INFOTAINMENT
PHONE/BLUETOOTH®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or
smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All Settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
VOICE
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. An available option is “Hey Uconnect”.
INFOTAINMENT 113
4
Setting Name Description
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is completed by the system. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List.
The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The
“Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
NAVIGATION
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
CAMERA
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Turn Signal Activate Blind Spot View This setting will turn the Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot View on or off.
114 INFOTAINMENT
MIRRORS & WIPERS
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
LIGHTS
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
● When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Interior Ambient Lighting
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of the interior ambient lights. The available options are “Level 1”
through “Le
vel 6”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
INFOTAINMENT 115
4
Setting Name Description
Proximity Wake-Up
Proximity detection is a system which activates specific interior and exterior lights as the vehicle is approached with a
valid key fob. This feature provides an increased sense of welcome and security as the user enters the vehicle in the dark.
This setting will turn the Proximity Wake-Up on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
BRAKES
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the settings related to the vehicle’s Brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a pop-up will display “Yes” and “No” options.
DOORS & LOCKS
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
116 INFOTAINMENT
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn
when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The
“2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The
“Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will
unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
Digital Keys This submenu will allow you to access Digital Key settings.
Power Trunk Alert This setting will allow you to turn the Power Trunk Alert on or off.
SEATS & COMFORT
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
INFOTAINMENT 117
4
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats This setting will turn Easy Exit Seats on or off.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting (if equipped) will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the
vehicle is started.
KEY OFF OPTIONS
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate when the vehicle is
OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut off. The available options are “0 sec”,
“45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Windows With Key Fob This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door are opened or until the Key Off Power
Delay time has expired.
118 INFOTAINMENT
AUDIO
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon
can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle
speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and
“-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started, if selected. The available settings are “Off”,
“On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” time is reached. The available
settings are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the
volume between 0 and 38.
INFOTAINMENT 119
4
Setting Name Description
Media Expander This setting will allow you to turn the Media Expander setting “On” or “Off”.
NOTIFICATIONS
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages from any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls from any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation pop-ups on or off.
120 INFOTAINMENT
SIRIUSXM® SETUP — IF EQUIPPED
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
● A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
SOFTWARE UPDATES
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the v
ehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
SYSTEM INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the v
ehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
INFOTAINMENT 121
4
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying information about the version of your
radio.
License Information When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the licensing information of your radio.
RESET
When the Reset/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button
can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth®
devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection. The available options are “Yes”
and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
122 INFOTAINMENT
PERFORMANCE PAGES
DESCRIPTION
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators, as received from the
instrument cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
with the capabilities of your vehicle in real time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen then press the Performance
Pages button on the touchscreen. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen to access that specific
Performance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features
be used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Pages include the following:
● Timers
● Gauges
● G-F
orce
● Propulsion
● Dynamics
If a USB driv
e is installed in the media hub, press the
Camera icon on the t
op right of the touchscreen when
using Performance Pages. A screen shot of the page
will be taken and saved onto the USB.
Screenshot Camera Button
The follo
wing describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
Performance Pages — Timers
When the Timers P
age is selected, you will be able to
select the Drag or Accel & Braking tabs. The following
will be displayed:
● Recent
The most recent successful run of performance
timers. If a run does not complete within the timers
limit, or is aborted, the values shown will revert to
the most recent valid run.
● Last
The last recor
ded successful run of performance
timers.
● Best
The best recorded run of performance timers, except
for braking data.
● Save
Pressing the Save button will let you save the visible
page, Recent/Last/Best. Any saved run over 10 will
overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect system
storage.
NOTE:
Pressing the Snapshot button in the upper right corner
of the screen at any time will save a screenshot of the
screen currently being viewed to the connected USB
device.
● With a USB jump drive installed, press the USB
button to save to the jump drive.
● Press the Uconnect button to save the runs to the
Owner’s web page.
NOTE:
Uconnect option will be grayed out or missing if
the vehicle does not have a valid Uconnect account
associated with it.
● Press the Cancel button to return to the Timers page.
The tabs on the Timers page contain the timers listed:
INFOTAINMENT 123
4
● Reaction Time
Measures the driv
er's reaction time for launching
the vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing
light (behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree)
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m], 1/8
mile [200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and 1/4 mile [400
m]).
NOTE:
Accel & Braking timers (0-60 mph [0-100 km/h],
0-100 mph [0-160 km/h], Brake from mph [km/h],
and Brake Distance ft [meters]).
● 60 ft (20 m) ET
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go 60 feet
(20 m).
● 330 ft (100 m) ET
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go 330 feet
(100 m).
● ⅛ mile (200 m) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go ⅛ mile
(200 m).
● ⅛ mile (200 m) Speed
Displays the vehicle speed at the time ⅛ mile (200
m) was reached.
● 1000 ft (300 m) ET
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go 1000 ft
(300 m).
● ¼ mile (400 m) ET
Displa
ys the time it takes for the vehicle to go ¼ mile
(400 m).
● ¼ mile (400 m) Speed
Displays the speed the vehicle was at when ¼ mile
(400 m) was reached.
Gauges
Performance Pages — Gauges
When selected, this screen displa
ys the following
values:
● Battery Level
Shows the battery life of the high voltage battery.
● Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage 12 volt battery.
● Potential Power
Shows the power available to the vehicle for it to run
at maximum efficiency.
● Battery Temp
Shows actual temperature of the high voltage
battery.
● F
ront Motor Temp — If Equipped
Sho
ws actual temperature of the front motor.
● Rear Motor Temp — If Equipped
Shows actual temperature of the rear motor.
● Front Motor Power — If Equipped
Shows the actual power used of the front motor.
● Rear Motor Power — If Equipped
Shows the actual power used of the rear motor.
● Front Motor Torque — If Equipped
Shows the amount of torque used in the front motor.
● Rear Motor Torque — If Equipped
Shows the amount of torque used in the rear motor.
● Wheel Slip
Shows actual amount of wheel slip.
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View page will
appear on the screen. This page shows gauge values
for the previous two minutes on the selected gauge.
Pressing the up and down arrows will cycle through the
details for each of the gauges. Pressing the minimize
button above the graph will return to the gauge menu.
124 INF
OTAINMENT
G-Force
Performance Pages — G-Force
When select
ed, this screen displa
ys all four G-Force
values as well as steering angle.
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
● Vehicle Speed:
Measures the current speed of the vehicle in either
mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum
value.
● Front G-Force:
Measures the peak braking force on the front of the
vehicle.
● Right G-Force:
Measures the peak force on the right side of the
vehicle.
● Left G-Force:
Measures the peak force on the left side of the
vehicle.
● R
ear G-Force:
Measures the peak acceleration f
orce on the rear of
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak
values. These readings can be reset by clearing peak
G-Force on the instrument cluster.
● Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle
sensor to measure the degree of the steering wheel
relative to zero (straight ahead) reference angle. The
zero degree reference angle measurement indicates
a steering wheel straight ahead position.
The friction circle display shows instantaneous G-Force
as a highlight and previous G-Force as dots within the
circle. The system records previous G-Force for three
minutes. If there are multiple samples at a given point,
the color of the dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors
more frequent will show in red; infrequent vectors will
show in blue.
NOTE:
Selecting the info icon in the top right corner will display
more information about the G-Force tab. This page will
only pop up if the vehicle is not in motion.
Propulsion
Performance Pages — Propulsion
The Pr
opulsion page of the P
erformance Pages App
will display information related to the vehicles power,
torque, and speed in the form of a line graph in real
time.
The top graph will showcase both the Power and
Torque, while the bottom graph will showcase the
vehicles speed.
NOTE:
The play/stop button can be found in the top left
corner of the graph. When stop is selected the graph
will freeze the graph from recording more information.
selecting the play button will reset the graph clearing
the previous trials information.
INFOTAINMENT 125
4
Dynamics
Performance Pages — Dynamics
The Dy
anamics page of the P
erformance Pages App will
display information about the vehicle's steering angle.
DODGE DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED
Home Screen
Your Vehicle may be equipped with Drive Modes.
Through Drive Modes, you are able to change how
the vehicle handles in certain conditions. The available
selections are Drag (if equipped), Track (if equipped),
Sport, Auto, Wet/Snow, and Custom (if equipped).
With Custom, you can adjust the available options as
needed.
To access Drive Modes:
1. Press the Vehicle button on the Uconnect screen.
2. Select the Drive Modes tab.
Entering Drive Modes
On the Driv
e Modes Screen, y
ou can make the following
selections.
● Mode Setup: The Mode name will change depending
on which one is select. Pressing this button will
display a screen with the individual subsystem
selections. Custom will provide the most freedom
in the selections where the preset Drive Modes will
provide less.
● Eco Buttons: The Eco button will appear when the
vehicle is in Auto Mode and place the Vehicle in Auto
- Eco Mode
● App Settings: The App Setting button will redirect to
the Uconnect Settings, EV Sounds submenu, where
Display Sync, Sound Generator, and EV Sound Type
can be adjusted.
Drive Mode Home Screen
The six (6) Drive Modes can be selected from the
touchscreen. They will change the global drive modes
of the vehicle. When switching Modes, the Subsystem
displayed on the bottom right of the screen will
change color to indicate their status. From left to right,
the symbols represent Propulsion, Paddles, Traction,
Suspension, and Steering.
DRIVE MODE SET-UP
Drive Mode Set-Up
Pressing the Mode Se
tup butt
on on the touchscreen
will display a selection of the real time status of the
subsystems. Depending on the current Drive Mode
selected, allows the driver to configure their individual
performance control and see how those configurations
affect the performance of the vehicle.
Configure Screen
126 INFOTAINMENT
Available Mode Configurations
Drive Modes Propulsion Paddles Traction Suspension Steering
DRAG - If Equipped Drag* On* Drag* Drag* Track*
Sport Off Sport Sport Sport
Street Street Street Street
TRACK - If Equipped Track* On* Track* Track* Track*
Sport Off Sport Sport Sport
Street Street Street Street
SPORT Track On* Track Track Track
Sport* Off Sport* Sport* Sport*
Street Street Street Street
AUTO Track On* Track Track Track
Sport Off Sport Sport Sport
Street* Street* Street* Street*
INFOTAINMENT 127
4
Drive Modes Propulsion Paddles Traction Suspension Steering
AUTO + ECO Track On Track Track Track
Sport Off - Eco* Sport Sport Sport
Eco* Street* Street* Street*
WET/SNOW Track On Track Track Track
Sport Off - Eco* Sport Sport Sport
Eco* Wet/Snow Street* Street
CUSTOM Track On* Track Track Track
Sport Off Sport Sport Sport
Street* Street* Street* Street*
NOTE:
The * next to the setting name indicates the default for
that Drive Mode.
Press the "i" button in the upper right hand corner to
view more information about the current Mode. To see
more information of the specific subsystem, press on
the name of the subsystem (ie. Traction).
Info Screen
SUBS
Y
STEM INFO SCREENS
The Subsystem Info screens can be accessed by
selecting the desired subsystem on the Mode Setup
screen or by swipping left or right when on a Subsystem
Inf
o screen.
Propulsion
Propulsion
128 INFOTAINMENT
● TRACK: Press the Track button on the touchscreen
f
or a track inspired throttle response and a higher
power output.
● SPORT: Press the Sport button on the touchscreen
for a sport tuned throttle response and power
output.
● STREET: Press the Street button on the touchscreen
for a balance comfort and economy.
● DRAG: Press the Drag button on the touchscreen
for an aggressive throttle response with maximum
power output and acceleration.
● ECO: Press the Eco button on the touchscreen to
reduce throttle response and output for maximum
vehicle range.
Paddles
Paddles
The P
addle Shif
ters control Regenerative Braking
levels.
● ON: Press the On button on the touchscreen to
enable steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
● OFF: Press the Off button on the touchscreen to
disable steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
Traction
Traction Control
● DRA
G:
Press the Drag button on the touchscreen for
optimized traction control for drag racing.
● TRACK: Press the Track button on the touchscreen to
provide minimal traction control and stability control.
● SPORT: Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to
provide reduced traction control and stability control.
● STREET: Press the Street button on the touchscreen
to provide full traction control and stability control.
● WET/SNOW: Press the Wt/Snow button on the
touchscreen to provide traction control and stability
control for slippery conditions.
Suspension – If Equipped
Suspension
● DRAG: Press the Drag butt
on on the touchscreen for
the best weight transfer and launch traction.
● TRACK: Press the Track button on the touchscreen
to provide firmest possible suspension and the
strongest comfort trade-off.
● SPORT: Press the Sport button on the touchscreen
to provide a firmer suspension and some comfort
trade-off.
● STREET: Press the Street button on the touchscreen
to provide a balance of suspension firmness and
ride comfort.
Steering
Steering
● TRACK:
Press the Track button on the touchscreen
to provide the greatest amount of steering feel and
steering effort.
● SPORT: Press the Sport button on the touchscreen
to provide an increased amount of steering feel,
requiring a higher amount of steering effort.
● STREET: Press the Street button on the touchscreen
to provide a lower steering effort.
INFOTAINMENT 129
4
Race Options
This vehicle is equipped with Race Options, which
pr
ovide settings for when using the vehicle on a track.
To access Race Options:
1. Select Vehicle Mode button on the touchscreen.
2. Select the Dashboard tab.
3. Select Race Options from the menu.
RACE PREP
The Race Prep screen display the current vehicle
conditions before a race. You can select the race type
of Drag race or Track.
The chart will display the current battery temperature
and monitor it until the battery is race ready. The
display at the bottom will show if certain vehicle
aspects are ready for the race It will monitor the
following;
● Battery Level
● Ambient Temperature
● System Health
LINE LOCK
The Line Lock tab will activate Line Lock on the vehicle.
Line Lock is designed to hold the front brakes, allowing
you to lock the front wheels while keeping the rear
wheels free. This is particularly useful for burnouts and
launching your vehicle with precision. Press the button
of the left side of the screen to activate Line Lock.
LAUNCH CONTROL
WARNING!
Launch Control is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Launch Control system is designed to allow the
driver to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a
straight line. Launch Control is a form of traction control
that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle.
This feature is intended for use during race events
on a closed course. The system is not intended to
compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity
with the race track. Use of this feature in low traction
(cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess
wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in an
aborted launch.
When using Launch Control, ensure the vehicle is on
level ground.
The Launch Control chart will show the total time it took
to achieve maximum velocity. The times are broken out
based on the Launch Control Intensity selected.
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
1. Press the Race Options tab on the touchscreen
and then select the Launch Control tab.
2. Adjust your desired launch intensity from Max to
Min. Max will provide the greatest intensity when
the vehicle launches. Min will provide the lowest
intensity when the vehicle launches.
3. Press the Activate Launch Control button on the
touchscreen; follow instructions on the instrument
cluster display.
● Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
● Put vehicle in first gear or Drive.
● Steering wheel must be centered with tires
pointing forward.
● Vehicle must be on level ground.
● Apply brake pressure.
● While holding the brake, rapidly apply and hold
the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle.
130 INF
OTAINMENT
● The ESC Off button is pressed to change the system
to another mode.
● The ESC system has a fault.
DONUT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Press the Activate Donut Mode button to set the vehicle
to easily do donuts in a suitable environment.
DRIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Press the Activate Drift Mode button to set the vehicle
to more easily drift.
INFOTAINMENT 131
4
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster display
to inform the driver if one or more of the conditions
have not been met.
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
will display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any
the following conditions:
● The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
● The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURE
NORMAL STARTING
Achieving Vehicle READY Using The Power Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
power button once.
3. The READY indicator will appear in the instrument
cluster display when the vehicle is in Ready to
Drive mode.
4. If you wish to terminate Ready to Drive mode, push
the power button again.
Power Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot Off The
Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The power button operates similar to an ignition switch
by providing two positions: OFF, and ON/RUN. To
change the power mode without starting the vehicle (to
power certain accessories), follow these steps:
1. Start with the power button in the OFF position.
2. Push the power button once, without the brake
pedal being pressed, to place the power button
in the ACC position (instrument cluster will display
“ACC”).
NOTE:
The vehicle is not able to be driven in the On
or ACC position, see “Achieving Vehicle READY
Using The Power Button” previously defined in this
section for further information.
3. Push the power button a second time, without the
brake pedal being pressed, to return the power
button to the OFF position (instrument cluster will
display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster.
To achieve Propulsion System Active (PSA) or Ready to
Drive mode, press the brake pedal while pushing the
power button.
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in
ð
page 142.
NOTE:
If the power button does not change modes when
the button is pushed, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. A back-up method can be used to
operate the power button switch. Put the nose side
of the key fob (side opposite of the emergency key)
against the power button and push to operate the
button.
AUTOPARK
A
utoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on
the following pages occur. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the par
king brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the gear box is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
● The gear box may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that
the gear selector indicator solidly indicates PARK
(P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is
properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
● It is danger
ous t
o shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the electric
motor is on. Before exiting a vehicle, always come
to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake,
shift the gear selector into PARK, and turn the
Start button OFF. When the Start button is OFF
position, the gear box is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
Start button is in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the Start button in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your v
ehicle is
in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the vehicle, if cer
tain conditions are met, the vehicle
will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle's
transmission to the PARK position. The rotary shifter
will automatically reset itself to the PARK position.
The vehicle's power button will then move to the
OFF position (electric motor off). When AutoPark
is activated the instrument cluster will display the
message "AutoPark Engaged".
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver has pushed the power button button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the on. If certain conditions are met, the
vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle
to the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake SAFE
HOLD feature will also activate in some conditions.
NOTE:
The electric motor will remain on.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
● Brak
e pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
AutoPark in Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not
pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the par
king brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the gear box is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
● The gear box may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
5
WARNING!
the gear selector indicator solidly indicates PARK
(P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is
properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the electric
motor is on. Before exiting a vehicle, always come
to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake,
shift the gear selector into PARK, and turn the
Start button OFF. When the Start button is OFF
position, the gear box is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
Start button is in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the Start button in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the gear box may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Achieving Propulsion System Active (PSA) Using the
Po
wer Button
1. The gear selector must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
power button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the power
button must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may park.
Park will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift to
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The gear position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) when
the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will
default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the previously stated
condition is met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left
in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AFTER STARTING
T
o optimize energy efficiency, the vehicle will
automatically control electric motor operation.
TO TURN OFF THE VEHICLE USING START
BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the Start button.
2. The Start button indicator will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed less than speed greater than 5 mph (8
km/h), when the Start button is pushed, the
instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not
In Park” message, and the vehicle will remain
running.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left in a READY state (vehicle
running) with the gear selector in PARK for one hour,
the vehicle will automatically turn itself off.
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle provides automatic notification, using a
three Horn Chirp Alert, cluster chiming, and a cluster
message "Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle" if the vehicle
was not turned OFF (still "Ready to Drive") and a
valid key fob for the vehicle is not detected within the
passenger cabin, following the opening and closing of
any passenger compartment door (requires all doors
to be closed before the key fob check will occur).
These automatic alerts are to remind the driver to
turn off the vehicle before leaving it, as well as, to let
the driver know that the vehicle's key fob may have
been unintentionally removed from the vehicle by an
exiting passenger. After providing the Horn Chirp Alert,
additional auto chirps will be inhibited until the gear
selector has been moved out of park or Start button
cycled.
BRAKES
DESCRIPTION
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. There will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal
travel during application, greater pedal force required
to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the power
button off), the brakes will still function. The effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than
that required with the power system operating.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
Your v
ehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
system that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
● Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
● Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect settings
ð
page 104.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the par
king brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages.
Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument clust
er and an indicator
on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
brake can be applied even when the vehicle OFF and
can only be released when the power button is in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is on the
brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
power button is ON/RUN, the transmission is in DRIVE
or REVERSE, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the power
button must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot
on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the car while the parking brake disengages. You may
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
5
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
NOTE:
● Do not rely on the parking brake to operate
effectively if the rear brakes have been immersed
in water or mud.
● Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
● When leaving the vehicle always cycle the Start
button OFF, remove the key fob and lock your
vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Start button of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
● Be sure the par
king brak
e is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
● Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the gear selector in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brak
e released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the par
king brake while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
Warning Light will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to
a complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the
parking brake will remain engaged.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought
to a complete stop using the parking brake, when
the vehicle reaches approximately 5 km/h the parking
brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle, may cause serious damage to the brake
system. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB system
is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
TRANSMISSIONS
ELECTRIC DRIVE MOTOR (EDM)
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the par
king brake. Always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
(Continued)
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
released. Make sure the gear selector is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the gear selector indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle
is completely stopped, and the PARK position is
properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
● If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle
is on. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the gear selector into PARK, and turn the Power
button OFF. When the Power button is the OFF
position, the gear box is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
Start button is in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING!
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the Power button in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the gear box may occur if the following
precautions are not obser
ved:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Park Interlock
Your v
ehicle is equipped with a Park Interlock which
requires the gear selector to be in PARK before the
Start button can be cycled to the OFF position. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the gear selector in PARK. This system
also locks the gear box in PARK whenever the Start
button is in the OFF position.
Brake/Gear Box Shift Interlock System
Your vehicle is equipped with an interlock system that
holds the gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the gear box out of PARK, the Start
button must be in the ON/RUN position and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shif
t from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
EV TRANSMISSION
The gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL and
DRIVE. The drive selector gear range (PRNDL) is
displayed on the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster display. To select a gear range, lift upward on
the gear selector. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the gear selector out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when the vehicle is stopped). Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual gear selector (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the gear selector will
shift into NEUTRAL and the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
5
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do no
t press the accelerat
or pedal when shifting from
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear range.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the propulsion system active.
The vehicle may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the drive selector into PARK if
you must exit the vehicle.
NOTE:
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the vehicle,
the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM) will
broadcast a sound from the rear of the vehicle (if
moving in the rearward direction) or from the front (if
moving in the forward direction) or from both the front
and rear if vehicle direction cannot be determined, to
warn nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is approaching.
In addition, the module will indicate a change in speed
by varying the volume of sound.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
se
v
ere transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brak
e by locking
the gear box. The vehicle propulsion system can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while
the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the gear selector into PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
● Apply the parking brake.
● Shift the gear selector into PARK.
● Turn the vehicle OFF.
● Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
This v
ehicle incor
porates an Electric Park Brake
activation feature which engages automatically when
the vehicle is parked on a 9% sloped surface, with the
vehicle pointing up the grade or down the grade.
CAUTION!
● Bef
ore moving the drive selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition t
o the ON/RUN position, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to
the gear selector could result.
● DO NOT press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you ha
ve properly engaged the gear box into the PARK
position:
● Look at the gear selector position display and verify
that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
● With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NOTE:
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the vehicle,
the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM) will
broadcast a sound from the rear of the vehicle to warn
nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is approaching. In
138 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
addition, the module will indicate a change in speed by
varying the volume of sound.
E-COASTING (MAX REGENERATION)
e-Coasting uses the regenerative braking system to
slow the vehicle when the accelerator pedal is released,
increasing the amount of energy captured to recharge
the electric battery. e-Coasting allows the driver to
increase or decrease the brake energy recovery by
using paddles located on the back of the steering
wheel.
Paddle Shifters
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
Operation
e-Coasting is controlled thr
ough the Paddle Shifters,
which are enabled and disabled through the Uconnect
Settings. There are three levels of e-Coasting:
● Level 1 - less braking and energy recovery
● Level 2 - increased braking and energy recovery
● Level 3 - maximum braking and energy recovery
e-Coasting le
vels are increased by pushing the (-) shift
paddle and decreased by pushing the (+) shift paddle.
The current e-Coasting level will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
PowerShot - If Equipped
PowerShot is a feature that allows you to accelerate
at max battery output for approximately 15 seconds.
PowerShot provides a push-to-pass functionality.
The PowerShot button is located on the bottom right
side of the steering wheel. Press the button to turn
PowerShot on/off.
Power Shot Button
The follo
wing PowerShot icons are displayed in the
instrument cluster:
● White - PowerShot is enabled (30 second timeout)
● Green - PowerShot is activated (15 second timeout)
● Grey - PowerShot is being prepared (time is
dependent on varying factors)
DRIVE MODES
OPERATION
The Driv
e Mode button is located on the bottom left of
the steering wheel.
Drive Mode Buttons
Use the left/right Driv
e Mode buttons to select from the
following modes:
● Drag Mode
● Track Mode
● Sport Mode
● Auto + Eco Mode
● Wet/Snow Mode
● Custom Mode
● Line Lock Control
● Launch Control
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
5
For more information on the Drive Mode buttons, see
ð
page 126.
For Race Options/Launch Control feature settings, see
ð
page 130.
EXHAUST
FRATZONIC CHAMBERED EXHAUST
The industry-first Fratzonic Chambered Exhaust delivers
a unique sound profile experience, pushing its one-of-
a-kind performance sound through an amplifier and
tuning chamber located at the rear of the vehicle,
marking a new generation of tactile, bone-shaking,
muscle attitude.
The exhaust sound and sound types can be enabled,
disabled and customized in the Uconnect Radio.
Fratzonic Exhaust
CHARGING
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located under the middle
section of the vehicle, below and in front of the second
row seating. The high voltage battery is designed to be
maintenance free.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
● Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
● Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately three percent of their charge per
month.
● Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
● Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and
discharged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service disconnect is located
behind the trim panel by the 12 V battery. Only a
qualified service technician should access the high
voltage battery service disconnect.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver try to remove the high voltage battery
ser
vice disconnect. The high voltage battery
service disconnect is used when your vehicle
requires service by a qualified technician at
an authorized dealership. Failure to follow this
warning can result in electrical shock, toxic
emissions, fire, and other hazards which can
cause death or serious injury including severe
burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness.
● The high voltage battery and battery case have no
parts that you or an unqualified technician can
service. The high voltage system can be hot during
and after starting and when the vehicle is shut off
or charging. Under no circumstances should you
or an unqualified technician open, disassemble,
penetrate, or tamper with the high voltage battery,
battery case, their cables, or connectors. Damage
to these components can result in electrical
shock, toxic emissions, fire, and other hazards
which can cause death or serious injury including
severe burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness.
You should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealership for any service or maintenance on
these high voltage components.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Y
our v
ehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last
the life of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
information on the disposal of the battery if it should
require replacement. Removing all cap bolds to match
warnings throughout publication.
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Your vehicle contains a sealed Lithium-ion high
voltage battery. If the battery is disposed of
improperly, there is a risk of electrical shock and toxic
emissions which can cause severe burns, respiratory
injuries, fires, and other hazards resulting in serious
injury or death. Bring the vehicle to your dealership
when the life of the battery is exhausted.
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery
Management system that is designed to:
● Ensure safe operation
● Maximize driving range
● Maximize performance
● Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage
battery
NOTE:
● During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking
noise may be heard from within the vehicle. When
the vehicle is in the ON/RUN position, the high
voltage battery contactors inside the battery are
closed to make the stored electricity inside available
for vehicle use. After the vehicle is shut down, the
contactors open to electrically isolate the battery
from other vehicle systems. The clicking noise is the
sound of these contactors as they open and close
during normal operation.
● The Audible Pedestrian Warning system will emit a
noise from the front of the vehicle when driving
forward at speeds below 22 mph (35 km/h). It will
also emit a noise from the rear of the vehicle when
in REVERSE, and fr
om both the front and rear of the
vehicle when in NEUTRAL. For more information on
this system, see
ð
page 155.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision:
● If your v
ehicle is still drivable, pull off to the side of
the road, when safe to do so, and place the Gear
Selector in the PARK position, apply the parking
brake, and turn the vehicle off.
● Beware of any exposed high-voltage parts or
cables. To avoid electrical shock which can result
in serious injury or death, never touch wiring,
connectors, and other high-voltage parts, such as
the inverter unit and the Lithium-ion battery.
● Leaks or damage to the Lithium-ion battery may
result in a fire and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respiratory injuries, and other
serious injuries or death. If you discover these
leaks, contact emergency services immediately.
Since the fluid leak may be Lithium Manganate
from the Lithium-ion battery, never touch the fluid
leak inside or outside of the vehicle. If the fluid
contacts your skin or eyes, wash these areas
immediately with a large amount of water and
obtain immediate medical attention to help avoid
serious injury.
● If a fire occurs in your vehicle, leave the vehicle as
soon as possible and contact emergency services.
Only use a type ABC, BC, or C fire extinguisher that
is meant for use on electrical fires. Using a small
(Continued)
WARNING!
amount of water, or the incorrect fire extinguisher
can result in serious injury or death from electrical
shock.
● If you are not able to safely assess the vehicle due
to vehicle damage, do not touch the vehicle. Leave
the vehicle and contact emergency services.
Advise first responders that this is a electric
vehicle.
● In the event of an accident that requires bodywork,
refer to an authorized dealership.
Regenerative Braking System (RBS)
Your v
ehicle has a RBS. The RBS replenishes the
vehicle's high voltage battery during deceleration, and
is particularly useful in stop-and-go city traffic. The
electric motors, which propel the vehicle forward,
can operate as generators when braking. The RBS
recharges the high voltage battery under certain
braking conditions by recapturing energy that would
otherwise be lost while braking. The electric power that
is generated goes back into the high voltage battery for
later use, for example when acceleration is desired.
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes,
regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the
vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions while
braking, ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle.
The RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic
service brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled
maintenance, and service intervals for the vehicle
service brakes must be followed.
eCoasting: Intervenes in place of the brake when the
throttle is released, allowing energy recovery when
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
5
slowing down, even when the brake pedal is released.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the system
recovers energy during the slowing down phase of the
car. eCoasting is possible if the vehicle is in the Drive
position.
eBraking: eBraking is always active regardless of
the selected operating mode, and activates the high-
voltage battery charging when the brake pedal is
pressed, thereby recovering energy during braking.
It is useful when driving in the city, where there
are continuous stops and starts. To make the most
efficient use the system, the braking phase should be
modulated by applying gradual pressure on the brake
pedal to allow maximum energy recovery.
Battery Conditioning
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in.
If the ambient temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below
at vehicle shut down, the instrument cluster will
display the message “Plug In Vehicle To Keep Battery
Conditioned”.
If the battery temperature is below -22°F (-30°C), or
131°F (55°C) or above, the vehicle will NOT start:
● If the vehicle is plugged in at these battery
temperatures, the instrument cluster will display
the message “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed”.
● If the vehicle is not plugged in at these battery
temperatures, the “Plug In Vehicle To Condition
Battery” will be shown in the instrument cluster
display.
● If the batter
y temperature is below -27°F (-33°C),
the message “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed” will be displayed whether the
vehicle is plugged in or not.
NOTE:
● When the “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed” message is displayed, keep
the vehicle in the RUN position for the battery to
recover. Place the vehicle back in the OFF position
when the message disappears, and then start the
vehicle. When this message is displayed, do not
operate any climate controls.
● Under these high or low temperatures, if the vehicle
is plugged in, and the vehicle is in OFF, the vehicle
may “wake up” to precondition the high voltage
battery for use.
● It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged in
overnight when possible to maximize the electric
range of the vehicle.
The messages will only be displayed when the vehicle is
ON, and the high voltage battery is not ready to provide
propulsion power. The message also displays if there is
a failed attempt to achieve READY state when the high
voltage battery cell temperatures are either too cold or
too hot.
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE J1772
charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for AC Level 1 (120
V), AC Level 2 (240 V) and DC Fast charge (400 V)
charging.
Vehicle Charge Inlet
Open the charge port door b
y pushing near the rear
outer edge of the door, near the center to unlatch. To
close the charge port door, engage the door latch by
pushing on the rear outer edge near the center.
When the Charge Cable is connected to the charging
inlet, the charge connector will lock into the port.
Pressing the Unlock button on the Key Fob will release
the charge connector.
NOTE:
Only utilize UL-certified (UL 2594) charging equipment
to charge your vehicle. Failure to do so may result in
safety hazards.
AC Level 1 Charging (120 Volt, 12 Amp)
— If Equipped
Your vehicle uses a 120 Volt AC, SAE J1772 Level 1
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE), also referred
to as a Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). AC Level
1 charging requires a conventional NEMA 5-15R 120
142 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
Volt AC grounded wall outlet along with the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE).
WARNING!
Please be sure to follow these warnings. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death.
● Discontinue use of the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if the plug or outlet becomes
hot to the touch or if you notice any unusual odors.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in building structures that use fuse-based
circuit protection. Use only with electrical circuits
protected by circuit breakers.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
other devices are plugged into the same circuit.
● When unplugging the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from the wall outlet, be sure to pull by the
plug, and not the cord.
● Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or drag the cord of
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
● Stop using the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if charging stops before it’s
completed when the plug or cord is moved or
adjusted.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
if the plug has a loose connection with the wall
outlet or if the wall outlet is damaged or rusted.
● If in any doubt about the wall outlet and/or circuit,
contact a qualified electrician.
● Do not use if a malfunction occurs or if the
Portable Charging Cordset has been damaged in
(Continued)
WARNING!
any manner. It is recommended that you contact
an authorized dealership.
● There are no user serviceable parts inside the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt
to repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), doing so will void the New Vehicle
Warranty.
WARNING!
Electrical shock, fire, and other serious hazards
can occur if the Por
table Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is not used properly. This vehicle uses a high
voltage current. Failure to follow the proper charging
instructions in this publication can cause serious
injury or death. There are no serviceable parts
in the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not
open, disassemble, penetrate, or tamper with the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Failure to follow
this warning can result in electrical shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury.
NOTE:
Aft
er use, the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should
be placed in the storage area below the storage lid.
If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) will be left
outside the vehicle, be sure to protect the connection
end from moisture, dirt, and debris accumulation and
contamination.
Lift Storage Lid
EVSE Storage Location
NOTE:
The P
ortable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is used for AC
Level 1 charging only.
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
5
WARNING!
This publication contains important instructions and
warnings that should be followed during charging
operations. Failure to follow these warnings and
instructions can result in electrical shock and fire
which can cause death or serious injury.
● Do not put fingers or objects into the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) connector.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
if the flexible power cord is frayed, broken, has
cracked insulation, or any other signs of damage.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the enclosure or the connector is broken, cracked,
open, or shows any other indication of damage.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
● The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) may
attempt to reset and run after a power
interruption.
● There are no user serviceable parts inside the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt
to repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) yourself – personal injury may result.
● When using a charging station with the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) attached, ensure the
charging station’s cable is not visibly damaged
before plugging into the vehicle.
● Do not allow children to operate the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE). Adult supervision is
(Continued)
WARNING!
mandatory when children are in proximity to the
charge station that is in use.
● Do not use a charge station or vehicle charge inlet
that is worn or damaged with the charging cable.
Plugging into worn or damaged receptacles may
cause damage to the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) and vehicle.
● Ensure that the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is always stored in a safe place. Do not expose
the EVSE J1772 vehicle connector to rain or wet
conditions. Avoid allowing water or other liquids
to pour or drip onto the vehicle connection end
of the J1772 EVSE connector. If water penetrates
the electrical device, the risk of electrical shock
increases. Ensure that all plugs and cables
are free of moisture before using the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE).
● In a collision, a loose Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in the vehicle could cause injury. It could
fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone
in the vehicle. Do not store the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) on the cargo load floor, or in the
passenger compartment.
● The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) has been
tested for use in temperatures ranging from -40°F
to 122°F (-40°C to 50°C).
● The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
stored at temperatures between -40°F and 176°F
(-40°C and 80°C).
EVSE CHARGING CORDSET
The Por
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) is compliant with
SAE J1772, and applicable for use with vehicles fitted
with standard SAE J1772 charge inlets. The Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) includes:
● A Charge Connector
● A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a Charge Current
Interrupt Device (CCID) with a status indicator
display
● An AC Power Cord with a NEMA 5–15P right angle
plug
● An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV-rated
● A Status Indicator Display
Charging Cordset
1 — Status Indicator Display
2 — Charge Cable
3 — Charge Connector
4 — AC Plug
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
CHARGING CORDSET OPERATION
1.
Insert the AC plug prongs of the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) into a 15 A, 20 A, 120 VAC, or 60
Hz, grounded wall outlet. Do not use an extension
cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a worn outlet. The
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) will not operate
safely unless it is plugged directly into the wall
outlet.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
plugged into a dedicated circuit, not a circuit
shared with other devices drawing electricity on
the circuit.
AC Plug And Wall Outlet
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
on electrical cir
cuits with tw
o-prong outlets; use
with improper outlets could result in electric
shock, fire, property damage, and death or
serious injury. Check with a qualified electrician
(Continued)
WARNING!
if you are in doubt as to whether the wall
outlet is properly grounded. Do not modify the
plug prongs provided with the Portable Charging
Corset (EVSE) – if it does not fit the outlet, you
must have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
2. Check to see if the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) is ready to charge by reviewing the indicator
lights. After a brief self-check, where the indicator
lights will flash, a green AC Power indicator light
and two green Charge Active indicator lights
indicate that the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is ready for use.
Cordset Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — Charge Active Indicator Lights
3. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is ready
to charge, ensure the v
ehicle is in PARK, and
then connect the charge connector to the vehicle’s
charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and coupled
with the vehicle’s charge inle
t.
Inserting The Charge Connector
Into The V
ehicle Charge Inlet
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the
Charge Active indicator lights on the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) will cycle from left to
right, and then both turn off. This pattern will
repeat while the vehicle is charging. The lights are
illuminated at the rate of approximately one cycle
per second.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
● Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) — The
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) status
indicators illuminate green or red to identify the
charging status.
● Wall Outlet — Check whether the wall outlet
is functional (no power outage) and/or plug
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a
different wall outlet.
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
5
● Charging Schedule — Check whether or no
t
the charging schedules have been enabled.
If enabled, check that you are within the
scheduled time and day of the week. If a
charging schedule has been enabled in the
vehicle, and it is outside the time and day of
the week, you may override the schedule for
this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it
back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the
double plug sequence within 10 seconds for it
to override the set schedule.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle
first, and then from the wall outlet. To disengage
the vehicle coupler, push the button on the
connector. The Unlock button on the Key Fob
needs to be pressed to release the charging
connector.
Removing The Charge Connector
Fr
om The Vehicle Charge Inlet
6. Close the inlet door when a Portable Charging
Cordse
t (EVSE) is not connected to the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is good practice to keep the vehicle in the OFF
position while conducting Level 1 charging. This
minimizes any additional vehicle loads the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) has to support. The additional
electrical loads will extend the high voltage battery
charging time.
TROUBLESHOOTING USING THE STATUS
INDICATOR DISPLAY
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
The AC Power Indicator displays the status and safety
of the input power. If this indicator is green, the power
is within acceptable limits to charge the vehicle. If only
the AC Power Indicator is flashing red, then there is a
problem with the AC power at the electrical outlet. If
the AC Power Indicator does not return to green, then
the outlet should be inspected by a qualified electrician
to ensure the voltage, frequency, and grounding are
compliant to national and local electrical codes and
ordinances. It may be possible to attempt charging from
a different outlet.
The Fault Indicator displays the status of the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) and the vehicle connection.
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) will not allow
charging while the fault indicator is red. If it is off, the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) has not detected any
internal faults, or faults with the vehicle connection.
If the Fault Indicator is flashing red, there is a fault
detected either with the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), electronics, or with the vehicle connection. The
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) may attempt to retry
to provide current to the vehicle if the fault is cleared. If
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) does not attempt
to provide charge to the vehicle, the charge connector
will need to be removed from the vehicle to clear the
fault.
The fault code list in the following table provides a
reference for the important faults that are detected by
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). When a fault is
detected, the AC Power Indicator, the Fault Indicator,
or both the AC Power and Fault Indicators will flash
red. If only the AC Power Indicator is red, there is
a problem on the AC Power side of the unit. If only
the Fault Indicator is flashing red, there is a problem
internal to the unit or with the vehicle. If both the
AC Power and Fault Indicators are flashing red, an
over temperature condition is detected at either the
AC plug or within the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
enclosure. Additional information about the faults is
provided by a fault code that is displayed on the two
green Charge Active Indicators. The fault code consists
of four digits, each with a value of 1 or 2. The value of
a digit is the number of indicators illuminated for that
part of the sequence. For example, fault code (1, 2,
1, 1) will display the following sequence: One indicator
will illuminate for 0.3 seconds, then two indicators will
illuminate, then one indicator, and finally one indicator
will illuminate. After all four fault code digits have been
displayed, the indicators will remain off for one second
before repeating the sequence.
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Fault Code List
Flashing Fault
Code
Flashing Indicator Fault Indication Recommended Actions
1, 2, 2, 2 AC Power Vehicle Current Draw is Too High Check Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle at an authorized dealership.
1, 1, 2, 1 AC Power Incorrect Electrical Supply Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a qualified electrician to check the
electrical outlet and AC Supply (house wiring).
1, 1, 2, 2 AC Power Incorrect Electrical Supply Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a qualified electrician to check the
electrical outlet and AC Supply (house wiring).
1, 2, 1, 1 AC Power Incorrect Electrical Supply Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a qualified electrician to check the
electrical outlet and AC Supply (house wiring).
1, 2, 1, 2 AC Power Incorrect Electrical Supply Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a qualified electrician to check the
electrical outlet and AC Supply (house wiring).
1, 1, 1, 1 Fault Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) In-
ternal Fault
Unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle charge inlet and retry to charge.
If the issue is not corrected, check the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle at an
authorized dealership.
1, 1, 1, 2 Fault Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) In-
ternal Fault
Unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle charge inlet and retry to charge.
If the issue is not corrected, check the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle at an
authorized dealership.
1, 2, 2, 1 AC Power Outlet Wiring Bad Ground Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a qualified electrician to check the
electrical outlet and AC Supply (house wiring).
1, 2, 1, 1 Fault Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) In-
ternal Fault
Check the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle at an authorized dealership.
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
5
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Fault Code List
Flashing Fault
Code
Flashing Indicator Fault Indication Recommended Actions
1, 2, 1, 2 Fault CCID Leakage Current Detected Disconnect charge connector and retry charging. If problem persists, check the Portable Charg-
ing Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle at an authorized dealership.
2, 2, 2, 1 Fault Vehicle Interface Connector Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check for water or other contamination in
the vehicle charge inlet or charge connector.
2, 2, 2, 2 Fault Vehicle Interface Connector Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check for water or other contamination in
the vehicle charge inlet or charge connector.
1, 1, 2, 1 Fault & AC Power Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
Enclosure Internal Temperature is
Too High
Use caution as the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) housing may be hot. It is recommended to
move the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) out of direct sun exposure. Allow the unit to cool. If
error persists, check the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) at an authorized dealer.
1, 1, 1, 2 Fault & AC Power Hot AC Power Plug Warning Use caution as the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) AC Power Plug may be hot. It is recom-
mended to carefully unplug the unit from the wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to
charge the vehicle at a different wall outlet. Contact a qualified electrician to inspect/replace
the wall outlet that was associated with the Hot AC Plug event. Charging will still occur, but at a
reduced rate.
1, 1, 1, 1 Fault & AC Power AC Power Plug Over Temperature Use caution as the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) AC Power Plug may be hot. It is recom-
mended to carefully unplug the unit from the wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to
charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a qualified electrician to inspect/replace the
outlet that was associated with the Hot AC Plug event.
NOTE:
During normal operation, the charge connector or AC plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during charging, unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) and have a
qualified electrician inspect the wall outlet before you continue charging.
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an outlet that is worn or damaged. Failure to
follow this warning can result in electrical shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury.
AC Level 2 Charging (240 Volt)
AC Lev
el 2 (240 V) charging requires a 240 V, Level
2 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) charging
station. We recommend using a Level 2 EVSE charger
with up to 48 amps for home installation.
When using public charging stations, ensure the
charging station is ready to provide charge and the
vehicle is in PARK before the Level 2 EVSE is plugged
into the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click”
when the charge connector is inserted correctly and is
coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If not,
please check the following:
● Charging Station — Check the indications and
instructions at the charging station.
● Charging Schedule — Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle
is currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(weekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override it
for this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it back
into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double
plug sequence within 10 seconds for it to override
the set schedule.
To stop the charging process:
● Press the butt
on located on the Le
vel 2 EVSE vehicle
connector.
● Remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet.
● Plug the charge handle into the Level 2 EVSE station
and coil the charging cord onto its holder. Do not
leave the charging cord lying on the ground.
DC Charging
DC Charging is a significantly faster method of charging
your vehicle either on the go or overnight. The DC
charging cable plugs into the vehicle straight from the
power outlet not needing the status indicator display.
When using public charging stations, ensure the
charging station is ready to provide charge and the
vehicle is in PARK before the charging cable is plugged
into the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click”
when the charge connector is inserted correctly and is
coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
NOTE:
● DC Charging can vary from high to low power
depending on potential external factors such as
weather and power supply.
● Due to the convenience of DC Charging there may be
a higher payment required depending on the charge
station selected.
● The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
○ Charging Station — Check the indications and
instructions at the charging station.
○ Charging Schedule — Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle
is currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(w
eekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override it
for this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it
back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the
double plug sequence within 10 seconds for it to
override the set schedule.
Vehicle Charge Indicators
There is a battery display indicator located on the
instrument cluster. The battery display will indicate the
current State Of Charge (SOC) for the high voltage
battery; with the percentage value located to the right
of the symbol. When plugged in, the battery symbol
also indicates the battery level along with messages
about the charge or whether the system is waiting to
charge due to the charge schedule. These messages
and symbols will appear unless there is a charging
fault. A green plug telltale will be shown in the cluster,
as well as applicable messaging when charging.
High Voltage Battery Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
5
Charge Port SOC Indicator
The SOC indicator pr
ovides a visual indication of the
high voltage battery’s charge status during charging. It
is also used to indicate a charging problem as well as
waiting for a scheduled charge to begin.
NOTE:
The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is
plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/day
of the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to begin
charging.
In extreme hot or cold environments, the lights on
the SOC indicator may not illuminate. Charge status is
available in the instrument cluster display. In the event
of an error in the charging process, the outer two lights
will blink red.
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminat
ed
P
ercent Of Battery Charge
1st green light blinks 0 – 20%
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
Percent Of Battery Charge
1st green light on, 2nd
green light blinks
21 – 40%
1st and 2nd green
lights on, 3rd green light
blinks
41 – 60%
1st, 2nd, and 3rd green
lights on, 4th green light
blinks
61 – 80%
1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
green lights on, 5th
green light blinks
81 – 99%
All 5 green lights on 100%
Two outer red lights are
blinking
Indicates an error in the
charging process
Lights turn on one at a
time from left to right
(when looking at the
front of the vehicle)
Indicates system is wait-
ing for scheduled time in
charge schedule to begin
charging
All green lights turn on,
then immediately turn
off
Indicates a successful
plug-in
NOTE:
For each segment of lights illuminated indicating the
percent of battery charge, two different blink rates
are used. A blink rate of 1 second on/1 second off
indicates that the first half is charging. The blink
rate will increase to 0.5 second on/0.5 second off to
indicate that the second half is charging. When the
battery is fully charged, the blinking stops and the lights
remain illuminated as charging continues.
Electric Vehicle App
Within the Uconnect system is the Electric Vehicle
App that allows you to see your vehicle’s power flow,
understand your driving history, and set a charging
schedule for your vehicle’s high voltage battery. To
access this App, press the Apps or Vehicle button
on the main menu bar of the radio’s touchscreen,
and locate the Electric Vehicle App. Accessing the app
brings you to a set of four pages: Power Flow, Driving
History, Schedules, and AC Charging Level.
Electric Vehicle App Location
DRIVING PA
GES
The Creep feature allows the vehicle to slow to a rolling
speed. The vehicle will come to a complete stop if
Creep is deactivated.
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
When Creep is turned off, the white telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster. The
Drive pages screen gives you the ability to
turn Creep on or off.
POWER FLOW
The Power Flow screen shows the current power
readings for all of the following:
● Electric Motor - Shows the amount of power (in kW)
the battery of the vehicle has remaining.
● Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
Climate Control system is using to maintain the
current interior temperature.
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of the
arrows on the touchscreen.
Power Flow Screen
DRIVING HIST
ORY
The Driving History screen shows the miles (km) driven
in kWh (battery powered) at the current time compared
to a weekly, two week, or four week average.
Driving History Screen
CHAR
GING SCHEDULE
T
o set a charging schedule, select the Electric Vehicle
App in the touchscreen and follow these steps:
1. Select “Schedules”.
Schedules Tab
2. Select “Charge Schedule”.
3.
Select the schedule 1 or 2 to be set by pressing
the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
screen.
4. Select what time Scheduled Charging should start
and stop charging or select “Charge Until Full”. If
“Charge Until Full” is selected a stop charging time
cannot be selected.
5. Set the Charge Start Time: Hours, Minutes, and
AM/PM.
NOTE:
This is t
o occur e
very week (as long as the vehicle
is connected to an EVSE).
Set Charge Schedule
6. When done, press "Sa
ve Schedule" to save the
charge schedule. The active schedule will be
indicated by the check mark to the right of the
schedule event line. The event action and time will
be displayed.
7. To add another Scheduled Charging event, repeat
these steps.
NOTE:
A maximum of two independent Scheduled
Charging events can be scheduled at a given time.
NOTE:
● If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary
to set up the charging schedule to charge the
vehicle.
● If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconnect system, the vehicle’s
battery will not charge. Charging will only begin
immediately if the vehicle is plugged in within the
time and day of the week set in the schedule.
Otherwise, charging will automatically begin when
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
5
the selected charge time/day of the week occurs or
whenever the vehicle is plugged in with no charge
schedule set.
● If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed,
which provides an option to begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks
the driver if they would like to “Charge Now?”
and provides other information, including the next
charging schedule start time and estimated time
to charge the battery to 100%. If within one hour
of selecting “Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a
powered EVSE, the vehicle will immediately begin
to charge (temporarily ignoring any set charge
schedule). To fully deactivate the charge schedule,
refer to the “Schedules” feature within the Electric
Vehicle App.
● The charging schedule can also be overridden if an
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged
in a second time to the vehicle. This “double
plug sequence” will override the schedule that is
set in the radio, and begin charging the vehicle
immediately. The double plug sequence must be
completed within 10 seconds for it to override the
programmed schedule.
● If “Charge Until Full” is selected, and the vehicle is
plugged in after the start time of the schedule, the
vehicle will start charging when it reaches the start
time the next day. If you would like to begin charging
immediately, and continue charging until the vehicle
is fully charged, you can select the “Charge Now”
option or use the double plug override option.
AC CHARGE LEVEL
The f
our
th screen within the Electric Pages App is the
AC Charge Settings screen. From this screen, you can
select the rate at which your vehicle charges. Rate
selections 1 (low rate of charge) through 5 (high rate
of charge) are available. The lower the selected rate,
the longer it will take for your vehicle to reach a full
charge.
AC Charge Level Screen
The A
C Charging Le
vel can be adjusted by selecting
one of the levels 1 through 5, with 1 being the slowest
rate of charge and 5 being the fastest. The display also
shows information related to:
● Battery Level — Indicates, in percentage, the high-
voltage battery SOC.
● Estimate time to 100% — Corresponds to the time
required to obtain full recharging of the high-voltage
battery.
MAXIMUM BATTERY LEVEL
The Maximum Battery Level screen will allow you
to adjust to total battery charge when charging the
vehicle. The available options are 80% Daily Range
and 100% Full Range. Setting the battery to charge to
80% will optimize performance over the lifetime of the
batt
er
y.
Maximum Battery Level Screen
VEHICLE L
O
ADING
DESCRIPTION
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown
on the Vehicle Certification Label. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
● Name of manufacturer.
● Month and year of manufacture.
● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
● Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front.
152 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
● Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear.
● V
ehicle Identification Number (VIN).
● Type of vehicle.
● Month, Day, and Hour (MDH) of manufacture.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
im
por
tant that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready
for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure
that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the
load evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's
GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier
items down low and be sure you distribute their weight
as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely
before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows
that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load
is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute
the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and
handles and the way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for
your vehicle's proper tire pressure
ð
page 238.
TRAILER TOWING
DESCRIPTION
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
DESCRIPTION
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind
another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
5
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on we
t or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and
road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may
cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and
stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
● Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
● Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
● Replace tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
● Keep tires properly inflated.
● Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for
im
pr
oved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path's
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your v
ehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Warnings
and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
● Driving thr
ough standing w
ater limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
● Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
(Continued)
WARNING!
distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
● Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
● Alw
ays check the depth of the standing water
bef
ore driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
● Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
● Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
● Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components.
Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids for signs of
contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any
fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in
further damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
SENSORS
AUDIBLE PEDESTRIAN WARNING SYSTEM - IF
EQUIPPED
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system uses distinct
sounds to alert pedestrians that your vehicle is
approaching. In addition, the system will indicate
changes in vehicle speed by varying the relative
volume.
The system uses two external speakers. One is located
in the under-hood compartment and the other is in
the rear of the vehicle. The Audible Pedestrian Warning
system is active when the vehicle is not in PARK
and is traveling at lower speeds. Depending on the
selected gear (REVERSE, DRIVE, or NEUTRAL), the
system activates the corresponding speaker location
based on the intended direction of travel.
WARNING!
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system is not
intended t
o avoid a collision. It is always the driver's
responsibility to be attentive to the vehicle’s distance
between other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly utilize brake operation to ensure
safe driving of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALER
T (RSRA) — IF
EQUIPPED
RSRA alerts you through visual and auditory
notifications of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet after a door was opened up to
10 minutes before the power button was placed in
the ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When
the previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the
message “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster
display and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver
placing the power button to the OFF position.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
ð
page 104.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to a
com
plete stop, then place the vehicle in the PARK
position and apply the parking brake.
● Always make sure the power button is in the OFF
position, key fob is removed from the vehicle and
vehicle is locked.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Ne
ver leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access t
o an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
COLLISION AVOIDANCE ASSISTANCE
SYS
TEM
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION OPERATION
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply haptic warning in the form
of a a brake jerk, to warn the driver when it detects
a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited
braking are intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 155
6
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors, as well as the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system, to calculate the probability of a forward
collision. When the system determines that a forward
collision is probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake
jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based
upon these progressive warnings, then the system will
provide a limited level of active braking to help slow
the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to avoid
the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient
brake force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required. If a Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system de
termines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
ð
page 259.
NOTE:
● The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
● The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
● It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
● The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is locat
ed on the Uconnect display
in the control settings. Forward Collision can be
checked or unchecked, see
ð
page 104 for further
information.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW OFF"
icon that appears in the instrument cluster display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW system
state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next.
If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the
vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to
ð
page 104 for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the Active Braking is set to “on”; this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
156 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIST
ANCE SYSTEMS
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
● The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after vehicle shut down.
● FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rate of speed.
● FCW disables in the same manner as ACC, and
will display a screen indicating that the feature is
unavailable when it has been disabled.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limit
ed the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads:
● ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
● Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If
Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system that provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display, and may apply automatic
braking when it detects a potential frontal collision with
a pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph (60
km/h), the system may provide braking to mitigate
the potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the
PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes. When the system determines
a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you
is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) — If
Equipped
ICA uses three fr
ont radar sensors located in the front
fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles from the
front or side when driving through an intersection.
When the system determines that a collision is
probable when turning across oncoming traffic, the
system will attempt to mitigate a possible collision by
decelerating the vehicle. When the system determines
that a collision with a crossing vehicle is probable, the
system may apply additional braking to supplement the
driver braking input to attempt to mitigate a possible
collision. The system will also provide audible warnings
and visual warnings (shown in the instrument cluster).
If the driver determines acceleration is needed to avoid
a collision, when the accelerator is pressed ICA will
cancel.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 157
6
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract these conditions. Electric motor power may
also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
● Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
● Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting these conditions.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
● Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural la
ws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING!
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
● Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively
affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system ma
y have multiple operating modes.
"ESC On"
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will
be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only
be used for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
158 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIST
ANCE SYSTEMS
"Partial Off"
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the power reduction feature of
Traction Control System (TCS) is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is reduced.
NOTE:
● For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to return
to "ESC On" mode.
● Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
● If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track" are ESC
“Partial Off” mode(s).
“Full Off” – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways.
In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
ent
er the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF
button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the electric motor ON. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and
the ESC OFF message will display in the instrument
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button.
WARNING!
● In the ESC “F
ull Of
f” mode, the electric motor
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an
emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC
“Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only.
● The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC A
ctivation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the vehicle is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the electric
motor ON. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the electric motor ON,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If
this light remains on after several key cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
● The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the vehicle is placed in the ON mode.
● Each time the vehicle is placed in the ON mode,
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 159
6
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
The T
CS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected,
the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduce electric motor power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the
TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly
to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply
the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
electric motor power to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
ESC are in reduced modes.
BRAKING PERFORMANCE ASSISTANCE
SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the vehicle is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the vehicle is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
READY ALERT BRAKING (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur
by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
(EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
RAIN BRAKE SUPPORT (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction
is required.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is wor
king properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
● ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
● Brake pedal pulsations
● A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
● The ABS contains sophisticated electr
onic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
● Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
(Continued)
160 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
WARNING!
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
● The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
● The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
● The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS W
arning Light will turn on when the
vehicle is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the vehicle is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
VISIBILIT
Y ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is start
ed, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the
rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
● The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
● The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change
if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the
trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports
equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle,
this may result in the BSM Warning Light remaining
illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 161
6
● The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side
mirror warning indicator lamps when a motorcycle or
any small object remains at the side of the vehicle
for extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle
is operated in areas with extremely low radar returns
such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop.
If a blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will display
in the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and
BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal
operation. The system will automatically recover and
resume function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.) and keep it clear of road contaminations.
BSM Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notif
ies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume,
ð
page 164 for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering Fr
om The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
162 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5
seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls,
foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and
your vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not aler
t you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
ð
page 259.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended t
o aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitor
s the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 163
6
Overtaking Traffic
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking
lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
Blind Spo
t has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. However,
when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a det
ected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced
so that the alert can be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of
the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced so that the
alert can be better heard.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced so that the alert
can be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
LANE CENTERING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Active Lane Management Operation
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes
while the driver is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60
km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
approaches (or crosses) the lane marking with no turn
signal applied, and the blind spot zone is not occupied,
the ALM system provides warnings to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries. These warnings
include a visual warning in the instrument cluster along
with steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings).
If the driver crosses the lane marking, the system
will either guide the vehicle back to the center of the
lane, provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both,
depending on radio settings.
When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change, and
a vehicle is detected in the BSM zone on that side
of the vehicle, the ALM system provides a warning in
the form of steering assist and/or steering vibration
164 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
(depending on radio settings) to guide the vehicle back
to the center of the lane.
NOTE:
● The system will suppress visual warnings, steering
vibration (if selected in radio settings), and steering
assistance (if selected in radio settings) when the
driver activates the turn signal, the blind spot zone is
clear of vehicles, and a lane change is occurring.
● If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a
vehicle in the adjacent lane, and the turn signal is
applied in that direction, the BSM LED on the mirror
will flash. If the driver continues to attempt the lane
change, steering wheel torque will be provided to
keep the vehicle within its lane markings.
The driver may manually override the steering assist
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any
time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the Active Lane Management system provides
a visual warning in the instrument cluster, as well
as a steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings), to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out
of the lane, the system provides a flashing visual
warning through the instrument cluster display as well
as a haptic steering wheel vibration (if configured in
Uconnect Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane
boundary.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
Turning Active Lane Management On Or
Off
The Active Lane Management button is
located on the switch panel above the
Uconnect display.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
Management button (LED turns off). A message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again (LED turns
on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last key cycle when the
Start button is placed in the ON/RUN position.
Active Lane Management Warning
Message
The Active Lane Management system will indicate the
current lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
Lane Departure
● When the system is on, the lane lines are gray.
Lanes Sensed (Gray Lines)
● When the system senses a lane drift situation, the
left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time, steering
assist warning is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 165
6
● When the system senses the lane line is being
cr
ossed, the left lane line changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is
applied to the steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
● The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
● If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle
begins to depart the lane at the same time the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects another
vehicle in the BSM zones, the system will provide
a haptic steering wheel vibration and/or steering
assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
Changing Active Lane Management
Status
Conf
igurable se
ttings for the Active Lane Management
system are available within the Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
Selectable Warning Types:
● Vibration Only
● Steering Assist Only
● Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are: steering
assist warning (hi/med/low), and the warning zone
sensitivity (early/medium/late).
NOTE:
● The system will not apply vibration and/or steering
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety
system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
● The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on
when the ALM system is enabled.
● The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged.
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Operation
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers
the vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds
up t
o 90 m
ph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system
limitations, see
ð
page 181.
NOTE:
● The driver should always obey traffic laws and speed
limits. Never drive above applicable speed limit
restrictions.
● The driver can override ADA at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long as
the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front is maintained. ADA will also keep your vehicle
centered between the lane lines, and monitor for other
vehicles in adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors.
Base Active Driving Assist System
The Base ADA system uses sensors within the steering
wheel to measure driver attentiveness, and requires
that the driver have their hands on the steering wheel
at all times.
The system will generally aim to keep the vehicle
centered in the lane, but when the driver turns the
steering wheel (e.g. to move farther away from a
large vehicle in an adjacent lane) the system will
reduce its control and enter "co-steering" mode. While
in co-steering mode, the system will provide reduced
assistance and allow the driver to control the path of
the vehicle. Once the driver stops providing input to the
steering wheel, the system will require a few seconds
to fully resume lane centering assistance, especially
during curves.
166 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
WARNING!
The driver is always responsible for determining if a
lane change is safe. Failure to follow this warning can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road traffic, weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead, position in the lane compared to other
vehicles, and brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
Some states and local laws may require hands to be
kept on the steering wheel at all times. For vehicles
equipped with the Hands-Free ADA system, ONLY
remove your hands from the steering wheel if the
Hands-Free system is engaged, it is safe to do so,
and it is permitted by state and local laws.
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist systems:
● When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g.
rain, snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road
(Continued)
WARNING!
conditions (e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane
markings, etc.).
● When entering a highway on-ramp or exiting an
off-ramp.
● When driving on roads that are icy, snow covered,
or slippery.
● When driving during difficult or uncertain
conditions.
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button
located on the right side of the steering wheel.
The steering wheel image will display white in
the instrument cluster display until the system is
engaged. If ACC was previously disabled, pushing
this button will activate BOTH ACC and Active
Driving Assist systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the ADA on/off
button, ACC will remain active and ADA will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are
met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA
on/off button, push the SET (+) button or the SET
(-) button and release when the desired driving
speed is shown in the instrument cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting
by pushing the Distance Increase or Distance
Decrease buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“System Engagement Conditions” in the next section,
the system will engage and the steering wheel image in
the display will change to green.
Active Driving Assist
Engaged (St
eering Wheel Green)
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 167
6
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met before the system
will engage and will NOT be shown in the ADA status
message location:
● Active Driving Assist system is enabled (white ADA
status icon)
● Turn signal is not activated
● Driver seat belt is buckled
● Driver door is closed
● Driver is not pressing the brake pedal
● Driver has hands on steering wheel
The following conditions must be met before the system
will engage and WILL be shown in the ADA status
message location:
● System detects visible lane markings
● Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
● Vehicle is centered in lane
● Vehicle is not in a tight curve
● Trailer is not connected
NOTE:
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering wheel
will not satisfy the hands-on condition to engage the
system.
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
System Deactiv
ation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
● The system initiates a Stop-In-Lane maneuver to
stop the vehicle due to driver inattentiveness. The
Stop-In-Lane maneuver can be overridden by placing
hands on the steering wheel and applying the
accelerator or brake pedal. Refer to “Indications
On The Display” in the next section for further
information
● If lane markings are no longer detected or poor road
conditions are experienced
● If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
● If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the blind
spot zone on the same side the turn signal is being
applied)
● If the driver performs an evasive maneuver, applying
high torque to the steering wheel for a short duration
● If the driv
er’s seat belt is unbuckled
● If the v
ehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)
● If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is pushed
again (ADA will turn off)
● If the driver steers out of the lane and crosses a lane
marking
● If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
NOTE:
● ADA will not enable if the system detects a trailer is
connected to the vehicle.
● Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button or
deactivating ACC will turn the system off. All other
deactivation conditions will place the system back
into the “enabled” state with the steering wheel
indicator displayed in white until all engagement
conditions are met again.
● When the system is deactivated, Active Lane
Management will return to its previous state, and
ACC will disable or remain engaged pending system
conditions.
Indications On The Display
The Active Driving Assist system status will be shown in
the following locations:
● In the center of the instrument cluster display by
selecting the Driver Assist menu.
● In the heads up display by selecting Advanced
Layout.
● In the Home tile display by selecting the Driver Assist
Tile.
168 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIS
T
ANCE SYSTEMS
The ADA status will be shown as an indicator light
around the cluster.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
previously described
ð
page 167, the system status
indicator lights will change from off, to yellow, to red.
The following indicators will change in color as warnings
to the driver escalate:
● Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in
the instrument cluster display or Head Up Display [if
equipped])
● Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver’s hands are not returned to the steering wheel,
the system will deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators (Steering Wheel Icon
Only) Is Green
● System is actively steering and providing speed
control for the vehicle and the system detects driver
is attentive.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
● Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning
the driver to place hands on the steering wheel and
look back toward the road.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
● Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or
driver take-over is required. The driver must return
their hands to the steering wheel. Upon driver take-
over request, the driver must return their hands
to the steering wheel, eyes to the road and (if
requested), press the accelerator or brake pedal.
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
NOTE:
F
or both Base ADA and Hands-Free ADA (if equipped),
the driver MUST replace hands on the steering wheel
and take control of the vehicle when the system is
deactivated.
System Status
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(yellow, and red), the system can also issue several
accompanying warnings intended to provide the driver
with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate a potential
collision.
Base Active Driving Assist System
● One haptic brake jerk warnings will be issued (red
warning light is issued).
● A steering wheel vibration warning (if enabled) will
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
example, when driving on a tight curve. The steering
wheel vibration feature can be turned on or off
within the Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
The driver can take control of the vehicle at anytime to
o
v
erride the warnings by pressing the accelerator pedal
or brake pedal, moving the steering wheel, and being
attentive to the road.
System Operation/Limitations
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist
feature, requiring driver attention at all times. To
prevent serious injury or death:
● Always remember that the Active Driving Assist
system is a convenience system that cannot
accurately detect all situations. Complete attention
is always required while driving, even when using
the Active Driving Assist system.
● Always remain alert and be ready to take control
of the vehicle in the event that the Active Driving
Assist system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full
functionality as described further before and after
this statement.
● Always keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the steering wheel when the Base Active Driving
Assist system is activated.
● Always keep your eyes on the road when
the Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
activated.
● Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and
pay attention to traffic conditions.
● Do not use a hand held device when either
Base, or Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system
is engaged.
(Continued)
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 169
6
WARNING!
● Alw
ays pay attention to the road when the Hands-
F
ree Active Driving Assist system is engaged. The
Active Driving Assist system will not steer to avoid
safety hazards, construction zones, objects, or
road impediments. You need to take control to
steer and brake the vehicle in such situations,
and when merging into traffic, exiting the highway,
making a turn for crossing traffic, or stopping for
traffic control devices.
● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could interfere
with the hand detection sensors.
The Base Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT
:
● Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
● Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
slower vehicles, construction zones or equipment,
pedestrians, or animals
● Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
● Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
● Change lanes
● React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of
ADA. For ACC system limitations
ð
page 181 .
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited
or reduced functionality when one of the f
ollo
wing
conditions occur:
● The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
● If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the
suspension, installing different sized wheels or tires)
or if there has been damage due to road hazards
● Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the
windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
PARKING AND REVERSE OPERATIONS
ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear and the front fascia/bumper and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g.
during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may
be automatically applied and released when performing
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
● The driv
er can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense
switch. The driver can also override automatic
braking by changing the gear or by pressing the
accelerator over 90% of its capacity during the
braking event.
● Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
● The automatic braking function may only be applied
if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid
colliding with a detected obstacle.
● The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear
of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
● The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system.
● ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through key
cycles.
● Automatic brakes will not be available if the park
assist system is manually turned off.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
170 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIS
TANCE SYSTEMS
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
ð
page 176.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last key cycle when the power button
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at
one of these gear selector positions, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased
to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
A display warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front and behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
front sensors detect obstacles from approximately 12
inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 71 inches
(180 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
When an object is detected within 71 inches (180
cm) behind the rear bumper while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, a warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 171
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/
or right rear region. As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a
single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous. If
the detected object is in the vehicle driving path, an
audible alert will also be given according to the chime
table.
6
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
172 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 71 in-
ches (180 cm)
71-59 inches
(180-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-35 inches
(120-90 cm)
35-24 inches
(90-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-35 inches (120-90
cm)
35-24 inches (90-60 cm) 24-12 inches (60-30 cm) Less than 12 inches (30
cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 173
6
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle.
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense Camera Activation
If the ParkSense system detects an obstacle, a camera
image will display in the radio. The camera will continue
to display as long as the ParkSense system continues
to detect an object. This can be turned on or off in the
Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected in the vehicle's path of
travel, and the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle's path
of travel is changed such that the object is outside of
the path, and then is brought back into the path, the
three second chime will be restarted.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Chime volume settings can be selected from the
Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and
high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through key cycles.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
ð
page 85. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
P
arkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the P
arkSense switch located on the
switch panel on the forward part of the
center console, in front of the gear selector.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the system
state.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will
be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If
the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster will actuate a single chime, once per key
cycle, and it will display a pop-up. The pop-up will
include up to two faults. Possible fault messages
are "Parksense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors",
"Parksense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors", or
"Parksense Unavailable Service Required.” The pop-up
message will display for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will display a "Parksense
Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors", "Parksense
Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors" or "Parksense
Unavailable Service Required" pop-up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with “Unavailable” at either the front or
rear sensor location depending on where the fault is
detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts
for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the "Parksense Unavailable Wipe Rear
Sensors", "Parksense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors",
or "Parksense Unavailable Service Required" messages
if an object is detected within the five second pop-up
duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "Parksense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors" or
"Parksense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors" appears
in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the
power button. If the message continues to appear, see
an authorized dealer.
If the "Parksense Unavailable Service Required"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
174 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Par
kSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
● Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “Parksense Off.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the power button.
● When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “Parksense Off” for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the syst
em misint
erpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “Parksense Unavailable
Service Required” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
● ParkSense should be disabled when the hatch is in
the open position. An opened hatch could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when backing up even
when using P
arkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
t
o recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
Side Distance Warning System — If
Equipped
The Side Distance Warning system detects the
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle using the
parking sensors located in the front and rear fascias/
bumpers.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING DISPLAY
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal
and with visual indications on the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
The Side Distance Warning volume/chime will match
the ParkSense volume and chime type.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 175
6
WARNING ALERTS
Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
12 – 24 inches
(30 – 60 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous Fast audible
chime as the
objects get
close to the ve-
hicle
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
audible tone will only sound if a collision is possible.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The system can operate only after driving a short
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7
mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be activated/
deactivated via the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense hard switch then the Side Distance Warning
system will automatically be deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning system
sensors. Free the bumpers of any obstacles, ensure
that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is displayed
if the Side Distance Warning system is not available.
The failed operation of the system might be due to the
insufficient voltage from the battery or other failures on
the electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the electrical system checked.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
● Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the message to
appear in the instrument cluster display will read
“PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the power button.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the P
ar
kSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the parking
sensors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is
recommended to remove the removable tow hook
ball assembly and any attachments from the vehicle
when it is not used for towing operations.
● Side distance warning uses the four lateral side
sensors to detect obstacles as the vehicle passes
them. Once the object is on the side of the vehicle,
its location is inferred based on its last known
location relative to the vehicles current location. If
an object is moved away from the vehicle after it has
been placed in a side warning zone, the system will
continue to alert for said object until the front/rear
lateral sensors can confirm the object has departed.
WARNING!
● Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using P
arkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
176 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
WARNING!
● Bef
ore using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnect
ed from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
t
o recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK
UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with
a caution not
e to “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note
will disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Vehicle Mode button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display. Then, select the
Camera tab.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay
turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the following
conditions occur: The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13
km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle is
OFF, or the touchscreen X button is pressed.
When manually activated, a counter will be initiated
after the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h). The
rear view camera image will turn off when this counter
reaches 10 seconds. The counter will be reset when
the vehicle speed is 8 mph (13 km/h) or below. If the
vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the rear
view camera image will continue to be displayed until
the Gear Box is shifted into PARK, the vehicle is OFF, or
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. Different colored zones indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 177
6
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a par
king aid. The ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow
, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist —
If Equipped
When enabled in the Uconnect system and a turn signal
is activated, the corresponding side view mirror camera
will display in the radio. The camera will continue to
display as long as the turn signal is engaged. Please
note, the Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist can be
enabled/ disabled from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system. The Turn
Signal Activated Blind Spot view will not time out unless
the driver returns the turn signal stalk to the neutral
position. The Blind Spot View can also be manually
enabled from the Uconnect Camera Setting Menu
described in the Surround View Camera Section.
WARNING!
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid to help detect objects
in the blind spot zones and may not provide alerts
when changing lanes under all driving conditions.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSA system,
always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use turn signals before changing lanes.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
SURROUND VIEW
CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or
a different view is selected through the touchscreen
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which
doors are open. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear hatch and side
mirrors.
Automatic Activation Of The Surround View Camera
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View will automatically be displayed on
the Uconnect touchscreen.
The Surround View Camera will also automatically
activate when the gear selector is in DRIVE or NEUTRAL
and the system detects obstacles it its path. Camera
view display will depend on the location of the detected
obstacle.
Manual Activ
ation Of The Surround View Camera
1. Press the Camera or Apps button located within
the Uconnect system.
2. Press the Surround View Camera
button to enter the camera’s menu.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
ð
page 104.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the vehicle is OFF. There
is a touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View Camera
mode is exited and the last known screen appears
again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
178 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft - 9.5 ft (1 m - 3 m)
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There
are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front
and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from
yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
NOTE:
● Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
● Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
● Top View will show which doors are open.
● Open front doors will cancel outside image.
● Open hatch will cancel rear image while in Top View.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path View button
will give the driver a wider angle view of the
rear camera system.
Pressing the Front Plus Top View button will
show you what is immediately in front of the
vehicle and is always paired with the Top
View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path View button
will give the driver a wider angle view of the
front camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Driver Curb View
Pressing the Driver Curb View Camera
button will give the driver an image which
shows the front driver side tire position
with respect to the pavement. This aids
the driver in parking scenarios where they need to
park close to a curb, parking lane or any other object/
boundary without touching the tire to it. The view will
time out after 10 seconds or when the vehicle reaches
a speed of 8 mph or greater.
Passenger Curb View
Pressing the Passenger Curb View Camera
button will give the driver an image which
shows the front passenger side tire position
with respect to the pavement. This aids
the driver in parking scenarios where they need to
park close to a curb, parking lane or any other object/
boundary without touching the tire to it. The view will
time out after 10 seconds or when the vehicle reaches
a speed of 8 mph or greater.
Driver Blind Spot
Pressing the Driver Blind Spot button will
give the driver a side-facing image which
shows the driver’s blind spot covering a
distance of three driving lanes from the side
of the vehicle.
Passenger Blind Spot
Pressing the Passenger Blind Spot button
will give the driver a side-facing image which
shows the driver’s blind spot covering a
distance of three driving lanes from the side
of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through
the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the
Rear View screen will return to the last known Surround
View screen. If the Back Up Camera was manually
activated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system, exiting out of the display screen will return to
the Controls menu.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 179
6
Front View Plus Top View
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
● The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13
km/h).
● The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
● The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
● The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu
ð
page 104.
NOTE:
● If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
● If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround Vie
w Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue
to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a par
king aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path. You remain responsible at all
times for parking safely while using the Surround
View camera.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist —
If Equipped
When enabled in the Uconnect syst
em and a turn signal
is activated, the corresponding side view mirror camera
will display in the radio. The camera will continue to
display as long as the turn signal is engaged. .
NOTE:
The Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist can be
enabled or disabled within the Uconnect settings
ð
page 104. The Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot view will
not time out unless the driver returns the turn signal
stalk to the neutral position. The Blind Spot View can
also be manually enabled from the Uconnect Surround
View Camera Menu.
WARNING!
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid to help detect objects
in the blind spot zones and may not provide alerts
when changing lanes under all driving conditions.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSA system,
always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use turn signals before changing lanes.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER ATTENTION ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) — IF
EQUIPPED
DDD detects when the driver is feeling
fatigued and warns the driver to pull over
and take a break.
To Activate/Deactivate
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
Uconnect system by selecting the following in order:
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does not
reliev
e the driver of the responsibility of driving the
vehicle. If you experience fatigue while driving, pull
(Continued)
180 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
WARNING!
over safely for a break without waiting for the DDD
to intervene. Only return to the road when you are
in the right physical and mental condition to prevent
endangering yourself and other drivers.
System Intervention
Using feedback obtained fr
om the driver’s steering
patterns, any buttons/switches that are pressed, and
from the front camera, the system implements two
operating logics:
● The first operating logic takes the driving style into
account, observing the road and detecting to what
extent the driver can continue driving with few lane
crossing events.
● The second operating logic measures the time spent
behind the wheel with the vehicle speed above 40
mph (60 km/h) and below 100 mph (160 km/h).
If the driving style indicates that the driver is unable
to follow the road trajectory and respect the horizontal
lane markings while within the operating speed range
of the system, a pop-up will display on the instrument
cluster display suggesting the driver stop for a break.
An audible signal will also sound.
If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the
system by pushing the “OK” button on the left side of
the steering wheel, the message will disappear from
the display.
If the driver does not acknowledge the warning will
remain active, until the drivers pushes the "OK" button.
NOTE:
In the e
v
ent of a DDD system failure, a dedicated
message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
SPEED CONTROL ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
● If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
● Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning system.
WARNING!
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
syst
em. It is not a substitute for active driver
(Continued)
WARNING!
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
● The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
and hold the vehicle in the stop position for
approximately 10 minutes when following a
vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead does not
start moving within 10 minutes, the parking
brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be canceled.
(Continued)
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 181
6
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
● When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
● When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
● When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
● When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — Advanced Driving Assist (ADA) Button
8 — SET (-)/Decel
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displa
y will show the current
system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active
Lane Management (ALM), and the Active Driving Assist
(ADA) systems. The information it displays depends on
ACC, ALM, and ADA system statuses.
Pushing the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) buttons will
display one of the following messages in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “ACC
Ready.”
ACC Ready
Adaptiv
e Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC: XX mph (km/h)”.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off”.
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The maximum set speed is 100 mph (160 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
182 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIS
T
ANCE SYSTEMS
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
● When the brakes are applied
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the gear box is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL
● When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
● When the brakes are overheated
● When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
● When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
● When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when no
t in use is danger
ous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
(Continued)
WARNING!
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) butt
on or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
While the accelerator pedal is pressed: a dedicated
graphic with the symbol flashing will appear on the
display for a few seconds; the system will not be able
to control the distance between the car and the vehicle
ahead. In this case the speed will be determined only
by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
NOTE:
Pressing the Cancel button will disengage the ACC
system. It will not turn the ACC system off entirely. Press
the Resume button will re-engage ACC.
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
● The brake pedal is applied
● The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
● The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
● The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
● The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
● The vehicle parking brake is applied
● The braking t
emperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
● Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
● Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
● The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
● The vehicle is placed in the OFF position
● The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system (if equipped)
is enabled/engaged and the ADA button is pressed
NOTE:
If ADA is not enabled/engaged and the ADA button is
pressed, the ACC system will remain on or turn on,
depending on the state of ACC at the time of the ADA
button press.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will
show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32
km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 183
6
Resume can be used at or above any speed above 0
mph (0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
● While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system
will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to
keep the vehicle at a standstill.
● ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. R
esuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Se
t Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster displa
y.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
● When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the electric motor’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake
system will automatically slow the vehicle.
● The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
● The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation and
necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(o
verheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between three bars (long),
two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates
and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting appears in the instrument cluster
display.
Distance Settings
1 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
2 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Increase butt
on and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one
bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
184 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIST
ANCE SYSTEMS
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by
one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show
the ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and
the system will adjust the vehicle speed automatically
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
● The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
● The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
● The distance setting is changed.
● The system disengages
ð
page 183.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument clust
er display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set
speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if the
vehicle ahead starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than two
seconds, the system will hold brake pressure for up
to 10 minutes. If no driver action is taken after the
10 minutes, the Electric Park Brake will be applied
and the ACC system will cancel.
● While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill (or
the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/h), and
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the Electric P
ark Brake will be applied and
the ACC system will cancel.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FR
ONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display the above message and the
system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 185
6
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
Front Radar Sensor
To k
eep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
● Always keep the sensor cover clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
● Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing
so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
● If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
● Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
sim
ply reactiv
ating it.
NOTE:
● If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
an authorized dealer.
● Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and
inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system
will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on
the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following a key cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may
need to intervene. The following are examples of these
types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
186 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC ma
y not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curv
e with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed
for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC per
formance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending
on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC ma
y not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane in which you are traveling. In the following
lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle
until it's too late for the ACC system to take action.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARRO
W VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 187
6
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does no
t react to stationary objects or vehicles.
For example, ACC will not react in situations where
the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider
this stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not
previously detect movement from it. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
OFF ROAD AND L
OW-RANGE OPERATIONS
ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
HILL START ASSIST (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
r
oll do
wn the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
● The feature must be enabled.
● The vehicle must be stopped.
● The parking brake must be off.
● The driver door must be closed.
● The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
● The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
● HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the drive
selector is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will no
t activ
ate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned of
f. To disable
HSA, see
ð
page 104 for further information.
UTILITY FEATURES ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system fuses traffic
signs detected by a forward facing camera with map
data from the vehicle's navigation to display the best
available information about the current applicable
speed limits. Displayed information includes:
● Unrestricted speed limit
● Conditional speed limit
● No passing zones
NOTE:
The TSA system will automatically display the detected
road sign using the unit of measurement (mph or
km/h) selected within Uconnect Settings, or within the
instrument cluster display.
Activation/Deactivation
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on
the instrument cluster display.
Traffic Sign Assist Modes
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system
ð
page 104.
188 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIS
T
ANCE SYSTEMS
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the
driver when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds
the detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the
instrument cluster display. The speed limit will be
highlighted in red for as long as the speed limit plus
offset is exceeded.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will
alert the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by highlighting the
speed limit in red and by sounding a single chime. The
speed limit will remain highlighted as long as vehicle
speed exceeds the speed limit plus selected offset.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs and no alerts will be issued to the
driver.
TSA Offset
The Traffic Sign Assist Offset will allow you to adjust the
offset range between 0-10 mph (0-15 kph) within the
Uconnect Settings.
Indications On The Display
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument
cluster display, and can display any combination of
signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and
supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending
on what information is available.
Traffic Signs Recognized
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
Inf
ormation (School Zone)
2 — Ne
xt Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
NOTE:
Location of traff
ic sign assist icons may vary depending
on the size of your instrument cluster.
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed, along
with a newly detected speed limit, indicating special
circumstances of which the driver should be aware.
Available supplemental information includes:
● School
● Construction
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed speed
limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the
instrument cluster display will show a red outline to
alert the driver.
CAUTION!
● Traffic Sign Assist is designed to assist the driver
and no
t to substitute the driver. It is the driver’s
responsibility to continue to monitor the vehicle
speed.
● Functionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
● The system may have limited operation or not
work at all in weather conditions such as heavy
rain, hail, and thick fog. Strong light contrasts can
influence the recognition capability of the sensor.
● The area surrounding the sensor must not be
covered with stickers or any other object.
● Do not tamper or perform any operations in the
area of the windshield glass directly surrounding
the sensor.
● Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always
be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 189
6
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven —
this is normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
See
ð
page 215 for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update
and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value.
CAUTION!
● The TPMS has been optimized f
or the original
eq
uipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor
is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall system
performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
● Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Af
ter inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
alw
ays reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
● The TPMS is not int
ended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
● The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
● Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces vehicle range and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
● The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
Warning Light.
● Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
190 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSIS
T
ANCE SYSTEMS
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and
to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
● Receiver module
● Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
● Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
● Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display an “Inflate to XX” message and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should this occur, y
ou should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition
(those shown in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure inflation value as shown in the “Inflate
to XX” message. Once the system receives the updated
tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will change
color back to the original color, and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
syst
em f
ault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Service Tire Pressure
System" message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value
to indicate which sensor is not being received.
With every key cycle, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message
will no longer display, and a pressure value will display
in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to
any of the following:
● Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
● Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
● Using tire chains on the vehicle.
● Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
size spare tire in place of a road tire that has
a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next key cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition,
the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 191
6
display a different color pressure value and an
"Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent key cycle, a chime will sound,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and
the instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire
Pressure System” message for five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS
will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies
that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/
h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on.
The instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message and then display dashes (--)
in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next key cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure
System” message in the instrument cluster but dashes
(--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the
“Service Tire Pressure System” message and then
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On
the next key cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
192 ENHANCED DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
DESCRIPTION
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located beneath
the infotainment screen.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazar
d Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time
to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazar
d Warning Flasher
s will continue to operate
even though the power button is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
ASSIST And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the ov
erhead console contains an ASSIST
and an SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
and Dodge Connect™ features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and Dodge
Connect™ services when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
● The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your Dodge Connect™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
● Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button to connect to a
representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance
will know your vehicle and its location. Additional
fees may apply for Roadside Assistance.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 193
7
● Dodge Connect™ Customer Care – In-v
ehicle
support for Dodge Connect™.
● Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
● Uconnect Customer Care – Total support for radio,
phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
Call button or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will
turn off the green LED light on the button.
2. The LED light located on the SOS button will turn
green once a connection to an SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
● Indication that the occupant placed an SOS
Call.
● The vehicle brand.
● The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and Dodge Connect™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and Dodge Connect™ services when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
● Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator,
the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to determine
if additional help is needed. Once the SOS
operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should
be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and provide
them with important vehicle information and GPS
coordinates.
WARNING!
● If an
yone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
f
ire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable network
and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
● The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
● Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each power cycle:
● The LED light located on the ASSIST and SOS
buttons will continuously illuminate red.
● The device screen will display, and an in-vehicle
audio message will state, the following message:
“Vehicle Device Requires Service. Please Contact An
Authorized Dealer”.
WARNING!
● Ignoring the Rear
view Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
● The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the system
is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
bey
ond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
● The power button is in the OFF position
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
● The SOS Call syst
em software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable
or obstructed
● Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
● Operator error by the SOS operator
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
● Weather
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
r
oad. AL
WAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
and Dodge Connect™ features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and Dodge
Connect™ services when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your v
ehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (v
oice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
TIRE REPAIR KIT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit is located in the hatchback.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, tire service kit models
may vary.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
7
Tire Service Kit
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with the Tire Service Kit. F
oreign objects
(e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from
the tire. The Tire Service Kit can be used in outside
temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is eq
uipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
● Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
● Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
● Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
● Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
overinflated.
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant
Bottle prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. See the
Sealant Bottle Replacement in this section for further
information.
● The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
● When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be
peeled off and properly discarded.
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
● For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris bef
ore
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
● The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
● The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.
● You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob
is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
● Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest t
o traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
● Do not use the sealant function on tires labeled as
having acoustic foam.
● Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
○ If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
○ If the tire has any sidewall damage.
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ If the tire has an
y damage from driving with
e
xtremely low tire pressure.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
○ If the wheel has any damage.
○ If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
● Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
● A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
● Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if
inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin.
It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
● Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex.
In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty
of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a
physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the power start button button to set the
switch to the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem
and then screw the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
7
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant
Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the vehicle is running before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing through
hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as
high as 70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8
bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the Sealant
Bottle is empty. Continue to operate
the pump and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the driver-side
door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at
the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
within 15 minutes:
● The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on
the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in
the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8
km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Hav
e the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50
mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
After Driving:
● Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
● Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflat
ed tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into
the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
● Place the vehicle in PARK (P) and cycle the power
start button in the OFF position.
● Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power
outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting
at the end of the hose onto the valve
stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on
the tire and loading information label
located in the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure
to the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area
in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
7
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Ro
tate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle a
way from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
● For sealant bo
ttle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
● The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
● Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to
the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to
ensure optimum operation of the system.
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
WARNING!
As required by current regulations, the information
on chemical substances for the protection of human
health and the environment and on the safe use
of the sealing fluid are on the packaging label.
Compliance with the indications on the label is
an essential condition to ensure the safety and
effectiveness of the product. Remember to carefully
read the label before use. The user of the product
is responsible for any damages caused by improper
use. The sealing fluid has an expiration date. Replace
the bottle if the sealant has expired.
CAUTION!
Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid properly.
Have them disposed of in compliance with national
and local regulations.
JUMP STARTING
DESCRIPTION
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
The vehicle requires its 12 Volt battery power to turn-
on the vehicle's high voltage battery. The high voltage
battery is used to charge the 12 Volt battery and
provide electric vehicle operation. If the 12 Volt battery
has been discharged, the vehicle can be jump started
using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle's high voltage battery has also been
discharged, it will need to be recharged to a minimum
operating State Of Charge (SOC) before the vehicle can
be started:
● If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle
will still require a jump start to allow the vehicle to
begin the battery charging process. Once the vehicle
charging has begun (indicated by the charge status
indicator on top of the vehicle's instrument panel),
the jumper cables can be removed from the vehicle
jump posts.
● If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1
or Level 2 charger where it is currently parked,
the vehicle can be moved by connecting 12 Volt
power to the vehicle's jump posts and then shifting
the vehicle from PARK (P) into NEUTRAL (N). Power
provided by the jumper cables will also allow the
Electric Park Brake to be released. Carefully move
the vehicle to a Level 1 or Level 2 charge location.
While the vehicle is being moved, the external 12
Volt power must remain connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE:
Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that
control of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure that
vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional movement
during and after moving the vehicle. If the external
12 Volt power becomes disconnected from the vehicle
jump posts or there is an interruption of the 12 Volt
power while moving the vehicle, the vehicle may shift
to PARK. Do not allow the jumper cables to come in
contact with each other or to the vehicle, this will result
in a short.
When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift the
vehicle back to PARK, apply the Electric Park Brake,
and start the high voltage battery charging. Once
the vehicle has been secured against unintentional
movement and high voltage battery charging has been
initiated, the jumper cables can be removed from the
vehicle jump posts.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause per
sonal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other boost
er source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR J
UMP START
The battery is stored under an access cover in the
hatch. Remote battery posts are located under the
hood on the right side for jump starting.
Jump Starting Locations
1 - Remote Positive (+) P
ost
2 - R
emote Negative (-) Post
NOTE:
The remot
e battery posts are viewed by standing on the
right side of the vehicle looking over the fender. The
positive battery post may be covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly
off the remote positive post which has a positive (+)
symbol on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the vehicle into PARK
and place the vehicle to the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
7
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the reach of the jumper
cables, apply the parking brake, and make sure
the vehicle is OFF.
WARNING!
● T
ake care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whene
ver the hood is raised. It can start anytime
the power button is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
● Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in per
sonal injur
y or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the discharge
vehicle) located directly behind the underhood
fuse box.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged batter
y. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
batter
y, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it pro
vides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
6. Once the vehicle is started, follow the
disconnection procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery, and
reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw po
wer from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
(Continued)
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
plugged in long enough without vehicle operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the vehicle from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
DESCRIPTION
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on
the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the vehicle remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC
On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
● Spinning the wheels ma
y lead t
o gear box
overheating and failure. Allow the vehicle to rest
with the gear box in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This
will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
gear box failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
● When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
● Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to gear
box overheating and failure. It can also damage
the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no gear box shifting
occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
DESCRIPTION
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Single Speed
Gear Box
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the Start button must be in the
ON/RUN mode.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
7
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use sling type equipment when towing.
V
ehicle damage may occur.
● When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
● FCA does not recommend towing this vehicle using
a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
● If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
vehicle must be in the ACC or ON/RUN mode, not
in the LOCK/OFF mode.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the v
ehicle is towed
with the Start button in the OFF mode. The only
approved method of towing without the key fob is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is eq
uipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle
ð
page 54.
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
● Do no
t leave children or animals inside parked
v
ehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deplo
ying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pe
t carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD M
AKE INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
hav
e questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA US
LLC dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
two to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the power button is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until
the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
ð
page 43.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 205
8
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or
turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
● ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
● ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor
mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
● ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with
the vehicle properly parked with the vehicle off,
(Continued)
WARNING!
fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference.
If your floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
● ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
● It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY
CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
206 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
● Check the operation of the interior and exterior lights
● Check the 12V battery terminals, cables and
connections
● Check the brake pads, r
otors, brake operation and
fluid level
● Check the steering, suspension, axle boots and
chassis components
● Check the wiper and washer operation, wiper blades
and solvent reservoir
● Check the tire pressure
● Check the cooling system reservoir/s
Required Maintenance Intervals:
R
ef
er to the following maintenance schedules for
the required maintenance intervals. More frequent
maintenance may be needed in severe conditions,
such as dusty areas and very short trip driving.
In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance
not specified in the maintenance schedule may be
required.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if nec-
essary.
X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Rotate the tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or if tread depth
difference is 2/32" (1.5 mm) or greater, whichever comes first.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 207
8
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000
km) whichever comes first.
X X
Drain and fill the Electric Drive Module (EDM). X
WARNING!
● Y
ou can be badly injured working on or around a
mo
tor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
● Failure t
o properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
(Continued)
WARNING!
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
208 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT
UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT
1 — Fuse Block 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
2 — Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap 4 — Windshield Washer Bottle
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 209
8
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
● Use only refrigerants and com
pressor lubricants
appro
ved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book,
for further warranty information.
● The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning com
ponents. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf
R-1234yf Air Conditioning R
efrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-
friendly substance with a low global-warming potential.
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with a N95+BIO HVAC Cabin
Filter.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove
the glove compartment tension tether and tether
clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the
glove compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove
compartment door and release into dash panel.
Left Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door tow
ard the rear of the vehicle to disengage
the glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
210 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
4. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, angle the
glove compartment in order to allow each side
travel stop to release the glove compartment from
the dash panel.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Door
5. Push the outside retaining tabs towards the cabin
air filt
er cover to release the cover from the HVAC
housing.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
1 — Cabin Air Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out
of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
1 — Cabin Air Filter
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
f
ilt
er pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully
engage into the HVAC housing.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
t
o indicat
e airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
8. Align the lower tabs on the access panel and then
push the top in to lock it securely back into the
dash panel.
9. Angle the door to get the glove compartment travel
stops back inside the dash panel.
10. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door
hinge.
11. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment
and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based
grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 211
8
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these
conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
● Wear or uneven edges
● F
oreign material
● Hardening or cracking
● Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and slide the wiper blade
away from the wiper arm to remove it.
Wiper Arm And Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
● Continued loss of coolant can cause damage t
o
the high v
oltage battery. Damage to the high
voltage battery can create a risk of fire that could
result to property damage, serious injury or death.
If the cooling system requires service, see your
authorized dealer.
● You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see
or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
● Some areas under the hood remain very hot for
a while after driving or charging and may cause
serious burns if touched.
● Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The cooling fan may start operating at any
time, including during charging. Hands or clothing
caught in a rotating fan may cause serious injury.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead and place the
power button in the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
the power button is ON.
212 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Coolant Checks
Check the coolant (antifreeze) pro
tection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the coolant is dirty, the system should
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of
the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for, cracking,
cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle
and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. If any coolant is needed to be added to the
system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 207.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information
ð
page 252.
NOTE:
● Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant, may
result in battery damage and may decrease
corrosion pr
otection. OAT coolant is different
and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant or any “globally
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant
products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or
anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator coolant and may plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolant. Use of propylene
glycol-based coolant is not recommended.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe battery damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This coolant
(antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important to use the same coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic A
dditive Technology (OAT) coolant that meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding coolant:
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
● Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the cooling
system.
NOTE:
● It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal battery damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact an authorized dealer.
● Mixing coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and
OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that coolant will
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 213
8
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion
bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do no
t open hot cooling system. Never
add coolant (antifreeze) when the v
ehicle is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated vehicle. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
vehicle damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used eth
ylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
vehicle off and cold, the level of the coolant (antifreeze)
in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on
the bo
ttle.
The radiat
or normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized.
If an examination of your compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If coolant needs to be
added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
● Maintain coolant concentration at a minimum of
50% OA
T coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically
ð
page 207.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with y
our f
oot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
Check the fluid lev
el in the master cylinder immediately
if the Brake System Warning Light indicates system
failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when
performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to
214 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the master
cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recommended by
the manufacturer, and has been kept in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
For further information
ð
page 252.
WARNING!
● Use only the manuf
acturer recommended brake
fluid. Using the wr
ong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
● To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
(Continued)
WARNING!
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
● Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot parts, causing the brake
fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken
to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
● Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
FUSES
GENERAL INFORMATION
NO
TE:
● When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or
vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
● Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the power
button is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
● If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems,
(propulsion system, transmission system) steering
syst
em or Body Control Module (BCM) blo
ws, contact
an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the power button in
the ON/RUN position may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blo
wn fuse)
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 215
8
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Front Power Distribution Center
216 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
UNDERHOOD FUSES
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
underhood compartment. This module contains
fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and
descriptions are printed on the inside of the power
distribution center cover.
Fuse Mapping
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F13 30 Amp Pink – (PF) BSM #2 - VALVES
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 217
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F14 50 Amp Red – (PF) BSM - MOTOR
F15 – – Spare
F16 – – FUEL PUMP MTR 1
F17
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
ELECTRIC OIL PUMP - EDM FRONT (800V)
ELECTRIC OIL PUMP - EDM FRONT (400V)
F18 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MTR 2
F19 – – BSM VALVE
F20 – – Spare
F21 – – Spare
F22 – 10 Amp Red POWER CONTROL RELAY COIL
F23 – 10 Amp Red (ESS) MOD_ECM (VOLTAGE SENSE)
F24 – 10 Amp Red (BEV) AUX HEATER PUMP
F25 –
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan
ELECTRIC AC COMPRESSOR (NON-BEV)
ELECTRIC AC COMPRESSOR (BEV) / ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEXV)
F26 – 20 Amp Yellow SLM FEED_LT
218 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F27 – – Spare
F28 – 10 Amp Red COOLANT PROPORTIONING VALVE / HTL & LTR BYPASS VALVE
F29 – – Spare
F30 – 10 Amp Red
KEYLESS IGNITION NODE MODULE (KINM) / RADIO FREQUENCY HUB (RFHM) / ELETRIC
PARK BRAKE (EPB) SWITCH
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – 5 Amp Tan (BEV) ELECTRIC COOLANT HEATER (ECH)
F34 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F35 –
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
(BEV) PECP (POWER ELECTRONICS COOLANT PUMP)
F36 – – Spare
F37 –
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
(BEV) BATTERY COOLANT PUMP (BCP)
F38 – – Spare
F39 – 10 Amp Red ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) #1
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 219
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F40 – 20 Amp Yellow
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) #2 / BRAKE SYSTEM MODULE (BSM) #2 / ESCL / MOD
IAIR SUSPENSION / SWITCHABLE ENGINE MOUNT #1 & #2
F41 – 10 Amp Red
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) / TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) / ECC (HVAC)
BLOWER RELAY COIL / BSM #1 / ELSD / MOD_SLM
F42 – 10 Amp Red LONG RANGE RADAR FRONT
F43 – – Spare
F44 – – Spare
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow (BEV) ADCM
F46 – 10 Amp Red DAMPING CONTROL MODULE
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 30 Amp Pink – FRONT WINDSHIELD DEFROST
F50 40 Amp Green – ECC (HVAC) BLOWER
F51 – – Spare
F52 – 10 Amp Red ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO (CMCM)
220 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow SLM FEED_RT
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – 10 Amp Red PORT DIAGNOSTICS
F59 – 15 Amp Blue POLICE SPOT LAMP_LT
F60 –
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
(GAS) LTR COOLANT PUMP (B+) / DRIVER MOTOR POWER INVERTER (DMPI) FEED (B1 & B2)
(BEV) PECP-2 (B+)
F61 – 5 Amp Tan MID RANGE RADAR REAR L&R / MID RANGE RADAR FRONT L&R
F62 – 30 Amp Green MOD IAIR SUSPENSION VALVES
F63 – 10 Amp Red STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE (SCCM)
F64 – 10 Amp Red
OUTSIDE HEAT EXCHANG EXPANSION VALVE MODULE (OEXV) / CHILLER EXPANSION VALVE
MODULE (CEXV)
F65 – 7.5 Amp Brown HEATED WASHER NOZZLE
F66 – 15 Amp Blue
ACTIVE SWAY BAR SYSTEM (ASBS) / ELECTRONIC STEERING COLUMN LOCK (ESCL) / GRILL /
BADGE LAMP
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 221
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F67 – 15 Amp Blue INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER (IPC)
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM)
F69 – 10 Amp Red
MOD_DCSD / HANDSFREE LIFTGATE MODULE / UCI + USB PORT / HUMIDITY AND RAIN
LIGHT SENSOR (HRLS) / ACT_COOLANT_VALVE-LCVM / MAP TRACKING MODULE (MIM) / AC-
TIVE GRILL SHUTTER (AGS)
F70 – – Spare
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red ADCAM
F73 – 15 Amp Blue POLICE SPOT LAMP_RT
F74 – 15 Amp Blue
SURGE SOLENOID, OIL_LEVEL_SENSOR, SOL_MAKE_UP_AIR_VALVE, SOL_OBD_BYPASS, 02
HEATER #1 - #4
F75 – 25 Amp Clear ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) / ACT_SHORT_RUNNER_VALVE
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow
(GAS) FUEL INJECTORS / IGNITION COILS / IGNITION COIL CAPACITORS / MOD_ISCM /
COIL_ON_PLUG*6
F77 – – Spare
F78 50 Amp Red – MOD AIR SUSPENSION
F79 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
222 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F80 40 Amp Green – BCM FEED 4
F81 20 Amp Blue – (GAS) MOD_ECM
F82 30 Amp Pink – FRT WIPER FUSE
F83 50 Amp Red – BCM FEED 1
F84 30 Amp Pink – DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM)
F85 50 Amp Red – BSM PUMP
REAR INTERIOR FUSES
There is also a pow
er distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and
descriptions are printed on the inside of the power
distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 223
8
Fuse Mapping
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F06 – – Spare
224 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 50 Amp Red – MOD_BCM FEED #2
F12 – 5 Amp Tan INTELLIGENT BATTERY SENSOR (IBS)
F13 – – Spare
F14 20 Amp Blue –
MOD DOOR MUX_PASSENGER REAR OR
SMART MOTOR
F15A
F15B
– 10 Amp Red
INTELLIGENT EVENT BASE LIGHTING
MODULE / ANIMATION LIGHTING - TAIL-
LAMP
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
(ORC)
F16 – 10 Amp Red IDCM - 800V / IDCM 400V
F17 – – Spare
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 225
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F18 20 Amp Blue –
400V: (BEV) ELECTRIC OIL PUMP - EDM
REAR
F19A
F19B
– 10 Amp Red
EVCU - 2_FEED #2 (BEV)
REAR WINDOW
SWITCHES / MOD_HVAC_CTRL_FT /
MOD_ICS_SWITCH BANK /
SW_BANK_UPPER (ASBM#2) / DIGITAL
TV (DTV) JAPAN / ASSY_OVERHEAD_CON-
SOLE - OHC W SUNSHADE
F20A
F20B
– 10 Amp Red
ELECTRIC DRIVE MOTOR FEED #1 FRONT
(BEV)
ELECTRIC DRIVE MOTOR FEED #2 FRONT
(BEV)
F21A
F21B
– 10 Amp Red
ELECTRIC DRIVE MOTOR FEED #1 - REAR
HVIL - MAIN POWER FEED / HVIL - RE-
DUNDANT POWER FEED
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red MOD_CVPAM / CVADAS
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
226 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F26 20 Amp Blue –
ELECTRIC DRIVE MOTOR FEED #2 - REAR
(BEV ONLY)
F27 – – Spare
F28 – – Spare
F29A
F29B
– 15 Amp Blue
INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER (IPC) /
DRIVETRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) /
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM MODULE
(DASM) / EVCU-2 / HVAC_CTRL_FT
FRONT AXLE DISCONNECT (FAD) / WHEL
END DISCONNECT (400 BEV ONLY)
F30 30 Amp Pink –
MOD_MEMORY / POWER SEAT - PASS
FRT
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink –
ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
(ELSD) - REAR #1
F35 – – Spare
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 227
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F36A
F36B
– 10 Amp Red
L2: DRIVER ALERT LIGHTING MODULE
(DALM) / ADAS_E_STOP / BEV: EVCU-2 /
E_STOP
QUIET VEHICLE PEDESTRIAN MODULE
(QVPM) (BEV)
F37 30 Amp Pink –
TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE_AFTER-
MARKET (PF)
F38 – 10 Amp Red
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SHIFTER MODULE
(AGSM)
F39 – 20 Amp Yellow MODULE SEAT HEATER FRT (PASS)
F40 – 30 Amp Green MOD AUDIO AMPLIFIER #1 A
F41 30 Amp Pink – MOD DOOR MUX_DRIVER
F42A
F42B
– – Spare
F43 – 30 Amp Green AMPLIFIER - SOUND GENERATOR #1A
F44A
F44B
– 20 Amp Yellow
12V POWER OUTLET - CARGO AREA - IGN
12V POWER OUTLET - CONSOLE BIN
228 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F45 – 15 Amp Blue
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD - FT. CON-
SOLE / MOD_ICS_SWITH BANK_REAR (FT
CONSOLE)
F46 30 Amp Pink –
MOD_MEMORY / POWER SEAT - DRIVER
FRT
F47 20 Amp Blue – EVCU - 2_FEED #3
F48 30 Amp Pink – MOD DOOR MUX_PASSENGER
F49 – 30 Amp Green AMPLIFIER - SOUND GENERATOR #1B
F50 – 10 Amp Red
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
(ORC)
F51 – 10 Amp Red
CHARGE PORT INDICATOR (CPIM) / ELEC-
TRIC AC COMPRESSOR (IOD) / BATTERY
CHARGE INDICATOR
F52 – 10 Amp Red ANIMATION LIGHTING - RR LT
F53 20 Amp Blue – EVCU - 2_FEED #4
F54 20 Amp Blue –
MOD DOOR MUX_DRIVER REAR OR
SMART MOTOR
F55 25 Amp White – TRAILER TOW MODULE #2
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 229
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F56 30 Amp Pink – SUNROOF
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow
HAPTIC LANE FEEBACK MODULE (HALF) /
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
(OCM) / TRAILER TOW MODULE (TTM) /
HEADLIGHT LEVELING - MOTOR FEED &
REF SIGNAL TO SWITCH / MOD_SECURI-
TY GATEWAY (SGW) / PARKTRONICS SYS-
TEM MODULE (PTS)
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
BATTERY PACK CONTROL MODULE
(BPCM)
F59 – 15 Amp Blue
TELEMATICS BOX MODULE (TBM) / VEHI-
CLE THEFT MODULE (VTM) / GATEWAY
SECURITY MOD / ALARM SIREN UNIT
(ASU) / ULTRA-SONIC ALARM MODULE
(UAM)
F60 – – Spare
F61 30 Amp Pink –
ASSY_TRAILER_TOW_RECEPTACLE FUSE
B+
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow MODULE SEAT HEATER FRT (DRIVER)
F63 25 Amp White – TRIALER TOW MODULE #1
F64 – 5 Amp Tan NFC DOOR HANDLE #2
230 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F68 – 15 Amp Blue
ASSY_MIRROR_INSIDE_RR_VIEW / SUN-
ROOF-DUAL_PANE / DTV (CHINA/JA-
PAN) / PORT_UCI_2_CONSOLE
F69 – 15 Amp Blue
LUMBAR SUPPORT DRIVER & PASSEN-
GER SW
F70 – 10 Amp Red EVCU - 2_FEED #1
F71 – 15 Amp Blue BATTERY PACK CONTROL MODULE
(BPCM)
F72 – 10 Amp Red HEATED SEAT SWITCH - RR RT & RR LT
F73 – 15 Amp Blue
PORT_UCL_2 / MOD_CVPM / NIGHT VI-
SION MODULE / DRIVER MONITORING
SYSTEM MODULE (DMSM)
F74 – 30 Amp Green MOD AUDIO AMPLIFIER #1B
F75 – 5 Amp Tan NFC DOOR HANDLE #3
F76 – 5 Amp Tan NFC DOOR HANDLE #4
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD_CRSM (HEAT SEAT RR RT)
F78 40 Amp Green – MOD_BCM FEED #3
F79 – – Spare
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 231
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F80 – 10 Amp Red PF: APM - 800V
F81 – 15 Amp Blue FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY MODULE
(FPDM) / PORT_UCI_DUAL - USB-FRONT
- IP / REAR WINDOW SWITCHES /
MOD_HVAC_CTRRL_FT / SW_BANK_UP-
PER (ASBM#2)
F82 – 15 Amp Blue MOD_COMFORT STEERING WHEEL SUR-
FACE
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue PF: MID RANGE SENSOR REAR LEFT
(MRSRL) / MID RANGE SENSOR REAR
RIGHT (MRSRR)
F85 – 15 Amp Blue UWB_SNSR (1-7)
F86 – 5 Amp Tan NFC DOOR HANDLE #1
F87 – – Spare
F88 30 Amp Pink – MOD_SPAAK
232 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
LIGHT REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS, NAMES, AND PART
NUMBERS
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this
section includes bulb description and replacement part
numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment
(Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Read-
ing Lamp
578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment
Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Center High Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
LED
Optional Door Map Pock-
et/Cup Holder
LED
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED
Front Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
LED
Front Side Marker LED
Rear Tail Lamp LED
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED
Rear Side Marker LED
Backup Lamp LED
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
License LED
REPLACING EXTERIOR
BULBS
Front LED Low/High Beam Headlamps
The front low/high beam headlamps use LED sources
that are not serviceable and must be replaced as an
assembly; see an authorized dealer for replacement.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be
replaced as an assembly, see an authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
The Front Park/Turn function is part of the headlamp
assembly and use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The headlamps must be replaced as an
assembly, see an authorized dealer.
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 233
8
Backup Lamps
The Backup Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The backup lamps must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
TIRES AND WHEELS
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
CA
UTION!
● Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The electric
motor, axle or other parts could be damaged.
● Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the electric motor and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE:
● P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
● European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
● LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for LT-
Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
● Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
234 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
● High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P2
15/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...."
= Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
● Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
● "R" means radial construction, or
● "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 1
6, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 235
8
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
● A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
● A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding t
o its load index under certain operating conditions
● The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the f
ollowing load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
● XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
● LL = Light load tire or
● C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicat
es the maximum load this tire is designed t
o carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
236 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be f
ound on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of T
ransportation
● This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (tw
o digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 0
1 means the year 2001
● Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 237
8
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The pr
oper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
238 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells y
ou important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity
if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and
cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard
ð
page 152.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
ð
page
152.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of av
ailable cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step
4.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 239
8
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
● For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should nev
er exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, aff
ect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
240 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
TIRES — GENERAL INF
ORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
● Safety
● Vehicle Range
● Tread Wear
● Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
● Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
● Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
● Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
● Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
● Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
● Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Alw
ays drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can pr
oduce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
● Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
● Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Vehicle Range
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher battery consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
● Check and adjust tire pressure with a good q
uality
pock
et-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
● Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
alwa
ys reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure af
ter the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 241
8
kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C)
for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation
pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer
or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on y
our tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your v
ehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
(Continued)
WARNING!
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
● The tire has not been driven on when flat.
● The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
● The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6
mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it
is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs
when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in
a Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NO
TE:
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
For further information
ð
page 203.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated b
y excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread w
ear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
242 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread groo
ves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced.
For further information
ð
page 243.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
● Driving style.
● Aero Mode - Driving in Aero Mode will reduce tread
life. Placing a vehicle in Aero Mode and using 3S
tires will reduce tire life.
● Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
● Distance driven.
● P
erformance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
year
s, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valv
e stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed
ð
page 242. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire side
wall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
ð
page 234.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do no
t use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating o
ther than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
● Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
(Continued)
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 243
8
WARNING!
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
● Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in f
alse speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires pr
ovide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,
be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer
.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Three season tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with three season,
be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with three season tires may exhibit
increased tire wear.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle contr
ol, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country req
uire the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120
km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
ð
page 195.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
tak
e y
our vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated f
or temporary emergency use
ð
page
153.
244 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and wat
er to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION
DEVICES
Use of traction devices requires sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following
snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
● Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
● No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
● Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 245
8
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Dodge 2 Door R/T
Rear
245/55ZR18
305/35ZR20
325/35ZR20
275/40ZR20
U Class
Dodge 2 Door Scat Pack
305/35ZR20
325/35ZR20
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
● Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
● Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8
km). Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
● Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
● Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
● Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
● Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. Always
use the suggested operating speed of the device
(Continued)
CAUTION!
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48
km/h).
● Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the fr
ont and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all
season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
246 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
NOTE:
The minimum tire rotation mileage is 10,000 miles
(16,000 kilometers)
For the proper maintenance intervals
ð
page 207.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
as shown. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
For vehicles eq
uipped with different size tires on the
front and rear, the rotation method should be "side-to-
side" as shown.
Tire Rotation (Side-To-Side)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPOR
TATION
DESCRIPTION
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned
by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a com
parative
rating, based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 247
8
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may ha
ve poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
TEMPERATURE G
RADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher lev
els of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
VEHICLE STORAGE
DESCRIPTION
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 3
weeks, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
● Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
NOTE:
The power hatch will not be operational when the
12 volt battery is disconnected. To prevent manually
opening the hatch we recommend leaving the hatch
open when disconnecting the 12 volt battery.
● Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run
the air conditioning system at idle for about five
minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This
will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize
the possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
NOTE:
When reconnecting the battery, turn on the ignition for
one minute. This procedure is necessary to prevent
battery drain.
Negative Battery Cable Label Location
Negative Battery Cable Label
248 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
BODYWORK AND EXTERIOR CARE
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your
vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and
other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
● Stone and gravel impact.
● Insects, tree sap and tar.
● Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
● Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BOD
Y AND U
NDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than
glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
● Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
● If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
● Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
● Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
f
inish.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel w
ool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
● Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
● If you drive on salt
ed or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
● It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
● If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
● If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
● If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
● If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 249
8
● Use Mopar® Touch Up P
aint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIOR CARE
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are pot
entially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solv
ents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or
if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® To
tal Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
● Direct contact of air freshener
s, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizer
s to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior
may cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
● Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be tak
en to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
clo
th. Dry with a sof
t cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather upholst
ery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
250 MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
MAINTENANCE AND VEHICLE CARE 251
8
GLASS SURFACES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
DESCRIPTION
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument
panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
SPECIFICATIONS
Com
ponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula O
AT (Organic Additive Technology).
Brake Fluid Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3, SAE J1703.
252 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
● Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) o
ther than specif
ied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze), may result in vehicle damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant (antifreeze) or any
“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator coolant and may plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
FLUID CAPACITIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Com
ponent US Metric
Cooling System 14.5 qt 13.9 L
Electric Drive Module (EDM) 2.75 qt 2.6 L
WHEELS AND TIRES
DESCRIPTION
Proper lug nut/bolt t
orque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using
a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
L
ug Nut/Bolt
Tor
que
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
148 ft-lb (200
N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remov
e any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 253
9
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star patt
ern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer
or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque
to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do no
t tight
en the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
254 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC’s
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
● Authorized dealer name
● V
ehicle Identification Number (VIN)
● Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services
if you are a purchaser for use of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance services last for eight years or
100,000 miles on the odometer, whichever occurs first,
calculated from the start date of the Basic Limited
Warranty, as set forth in your Warranty Information
book
1
.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
charge. tire service, lockout service or towing as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide
your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required
for covered services, license plate number, and your
1
To
wing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc. Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services are provided by Cross Country
Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 255
10
location, including the telephone number from which
you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will
be given the name of the service provider and an
estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an
unsafe situation, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within30
days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,
odometer mileage at the time of service, and current
mailing address. We will process the claim based
on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will
reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually paid,
based on the usual and customary charges for that
service in the area where they were provided. FCA US
LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is final.
Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
A claim can also be submitted online at https://
stellantis.roadsidereimbursement.com
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at
any time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject
to restrictions and conditions of use, which are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If your vehicle becomes disabled due to a result of flat
tire, Roadside Assistance will dispatch a towing service
to transport your vehicle to the closest authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
12v Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted 12v battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a 12v battery jump anytime, day or
night.
Out Of Charge
With Roadside Assistance, we have you covered if your
vehicle runs out of charge. Request an out of charge
service and we will tow your vehicle to the nearest
charging station to get you back on the road.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help
is just a phone call away. This service is limited to
providing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does
not cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance
will dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle
to the closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or
Ram dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you
will be responsible for the cost of the extra distance.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
256 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
OR
SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by
FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond
your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar®
Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
Mopar
®
Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable
protection against repair costs after your vehicle
warranties have expired. Mopar
®
Vehicle Protection
plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC
to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's
warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
Scan this QR code to learn more
about Warranty Information
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms
and provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for further
information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to
keep it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect that could cause a crash
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 257
10
or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highwa
y Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll
free at: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believ
e that your vehicle has
a safety defect, you should contact
the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers
who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government
should contact Transport Canada,
Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at: 1-800-333-0510
or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-
Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly
how to find and correct pr
oblems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
● 1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
● 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
258 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
● Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
● Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
● Exact Odometer Reading
● First and Last Name
● Phone Number
● Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
● Email Address
*
Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The f
ollowing regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 259
10
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ...........................................135
Active Driving Assist System ........................... 166
Active Lane Management System ..................164
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) .............................................................181
Adjust
Forward ..........................................................31
Rearward ....................................................... 31
Air Bag ................................................................ 44
Advance Front Air Bag .................................. 44
Air Bag Operation ..........................................44
Air Bag Warning Light ............................ 43, 45
Driver Knee Air Bag
...................................... 50
Enhanced Accident Response ............ 53, 204
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ....................... 204
Front Air Bag ...........................................44, 45
If Deployment Occurs ................................... 53
Knee Impact Bolsters ...................................50
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .................54
Maintenance .................................................54
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ................44
Side Air Bags .................................................50
Air Bag Light ....................................... 43, 90, 205
Air Conditioner Maint
enance .......................... 210
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................. 210
Air Conditioner System ....................................210
Air Conditioning ..................................................98
Air Conditioning Filter ......................................100
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .............. 98, 100
Air Pressure
Tires ............................................................. 241
Alarm
Arm The System ..................................... 19, 20
Panic ..............................................................1
3
Rearm The System ....................................... 20
Security Alarm ........................................ 19, 93
Alarm System
Security Alarm ........................................ 19, 20
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ............................................................. 8
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 160
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................................93
Arming System
Security Alarm ...............................................19
Assist, Hill Start ............................................... 188
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 102
Auto Down Power Windows ...............................25
Automatic Door Locks ........................................24
Automatic Headlights ........................................ 68
Automatic High Beams ......................................68
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..... 98, 100
Aut
omatic Transaxle ........................................ 136
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ..... 24
AutoPark ...........................................................132
AUX ................................................................... 205
AUX Cord .............................................................75
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........75
B
B-Pillar Location .............................................. 238
Back-Up ................................................... 170, 177
Batter
y ....................................................... 92, 140
Charging ......................................................142
Charging System Light ..................................92
Jump Starting ............................................. 200
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .....................13
Battery Saver Feature ........................................70
Belts, Seat ........................................................205
Body Mechanism Lubrication ......................... 211
Brake Assist System ........................................ 157
Brake Fluid .......................................................214
Brake System ..........................................135, 214
Fluid Check ................................................. 2
14
Master Cylinder ...........................................214
Parking ........................................................ 135
Warning Light .................................90, 91, 135
Brightness, Interior Lights .................................70
Bulb Replacement ...........................................233
260
Bulbs, Light .............................................206, 233
C
Camera, Rear .......................................... 170,
177
Capacities, Fluid .............................................. 253
Caps, Filler
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...................... 213
Car Washes ......................................................249
Cargo
Vehicle Loading .......................................... 152
Cargo Area Cover ............................................... 79
Cargo Compartment .......................................... 79
Light ...............................................................79
Cargo Light ......................................................... 79
Cargo Tie-Downs ................................................ 80
Certification Label ........................................... 152
Chains, Tire ...................................................... 245
Charging ...........................................................142
Wireless ......................................................... 76
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................. 235
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 205
Checks, Safety .................................................205
Child Restraint ................................................... 54
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ................................................56
Child Seat Installation .................................. 62
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ....... 60
Infant And Child Restraints .......................... 55
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .... 57
Older Children And Child Restraints ............56
Seating Positions .......................................... 57
Cleaning
Wheels .........................................................245
Climate Control .................................................. 98
Automatic ...................................................... 98
Coin Holder .........................................................74
Console
Floor ............................................................... 74
Contract, Service ............................................. 257
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............213
Cooling System ................................................ 212
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................... 213
Coolant Level ......................................213, 214
Cooling Capacity .........................................253
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................... 214
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...............................213
Inspection ....................................................214
Points To Remember .................................. 214
Pressure Cap .............................................. 213
Radiator Cap ...............................................213
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ............................... 213, 252,
253
Corrosion Protection ........................................249
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ....................... 181
Customer Assistance ...................................... 255
Customer Programmable Features ................ 103
Cybersecurity ................................................... 102
D
Daytime Running Lights .................................... 68
De-Icer, Remote Start ........................................ 19
Dealer Service ................................................. 210
Defroster, Windshield ......................................205
Deluxe Security Alarm ....................................... 20
Digital Key .......................................................... 15
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..................................203
Door Ajar .............................................................92
Door Ajar Light ................................................... 92
Door Locks
Automatic ...................................................... 24
Doors .................................................................. 21
Drive Modes .....................................................126
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................... 30
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ...........................................154
E
Electric Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 160
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................................27
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 215
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................158
Emergency Brake ............................................ 135
Emergency Braking ......................................... 157
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...................... 203
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................193
Jump Starting .................................... 200, 202
Towing ......................................................... 203
261
11
Engine
Fuel Requirements .....................................253
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ... 53, 204
Extend, Seats ..................................................... 32
Exterior Lighting .................................................67
Exterior Lights ........................................... 67, 206
F
Filter
s
Air Conditioning ..................................100, 210
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................... 68
Flashers ........................................................... 193
Hazard Warning .......................................... 193
Turn Signals ...................................69, 96, 206
Flat Tire Changing ........................................... 234
Flat Tire Stowage .............................................234
Floor Console ......................................................74
Fluid Capacities ............................................... 253
Fluid Leaks .......................................................206
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................... 214
Cooling System ........................................... 213
Folding Rear Seats ............................................ 35
Forward Collision Warning .............................. 155
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ................................ 193
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................................203
Fuses ................................................................ 215
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..................... 71
Glass Cleaning .................................................251
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................153
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...........................153
GVWR ............................................................... 153
H
Hatch Release ....................................................77
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water .............................154
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................193
Head Restraints .................................................29
Head Rests .........................................................29
Headlights
Automatic ...................................................... 68
Cleaning ...................................................... 249
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........68
Lights On Reminder ......................................69
On With Wipers ............................................. 69
Passing .......................................................... 68
Switch ............................................................ 67
Time Delay .....................................................69
Heated Mirrors ................................................... 27
Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 64
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ................................................................. 68
High Voltage Battery ........................................140
Hill Start Assist ................................................ 188
Holder, Coin ........................................................ 74
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................... 71
Hood Prop ...........................................................80
Hood Release .....................................................80
I
Indicator Lights
Blue ................................................................97
Green .............................................................96
White ..............................................................97
Yellow ...................................................... 96, 97
Information Center, Vehicle
...............................85
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................. 26, 193
Instrument Cluster ......................................83–85
Display ...........................................................86
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................... 250
Interior Appearance Care ................................250
Interior Lights .....................................................70
J
Jump Starting ......................................... 200, 202
K
Key Fob
262
Arm The System ............................................19
Programming Additional K
ey Fobs ...............14
Unlock The Doors ..........................................12
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 13
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) 14
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .........................................22
Passive Entry .................................................22
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 22
Keys ..............................................................12, 15
Replacement .................................................14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ......................... 69
Lane Change Assist
........................................... 69
Lane Management System .............................164
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................................... 38
Latches ............................................................ 206
Hood .............................................................. 80
Leaks, Fluid ......................................................206
Life Of Tires ......................................................2
43
Light Bulbs ..............................................206, 233
Lights ................................................................206
Air Bag ........................................... 43, 90, 205
Ambient ......................................................... 70
Automatic Headlights ................................... 68
Brake Assist Warning ................................. 159
Brake Warning ...............................90, 91, 135
Bulb Replacement ......................................233
Cargo ............................................................. 79
Daytime Running .......................................... 68
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 68
ECO Mode Indicator ......................................96
Electric Power Steering Fault ....................... 92
Exterior ................................................. 67, 206
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator ........................................................ 96
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................193
Headlight Switch ...........................................67
Headlights .............................................. 67, 69
Headlights On With Wipers .......................... 69
High Beam .....................................................68
High Beam Indicator ..................................... 97
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................68
Instrument Cluster ........................................67
Intensity Control ............................................70
Interior ...........................................................70
LaneSense Indicator .....................................96
License ........................................................234
Lights On Reminder ......................................69
Multicolor Ambient ....................................... 70
Park .........................................................68, 96
Passing .......................................................... 68
Plug Status ....................................................96
Plug Status Fault ...........................................93
Reading ......................................................... 70
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................... 93
Security Alarm ...............................................93
Service ........................................................ 233
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning ......................................................... 95
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) ... 95
Traction Control .......................................... 159
Trunk Open Warning ..................................... 92
Turn Signals ............................ 68, 69, 96, 206
Vanity Mirror ..................................................26
Load Shed Battery Saver On .............................89
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .............. 89
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............89
Loading Vehicle ...................................... 152, 153
Capacities ................................................... 153
Tires .............................................................238
Locks
Auto Unlock ................................................... 24
Automatic Door ............................................. 24
Power Door ....................................................21
Low Tire Pressure System ...............................189
Lubrication, Body .............................................211
Lug Nuts/Bolts .................................................253
M
Maintenance Schedule ................................... 207
Manual
Service ........................................................ 258
Media Hub ..........................................................75
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................28
Memory Seat ......................................................28
Memory Seats And Radio ..................................28
Memory Settings ................................................28
Mirrors ................................................................ 26
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 26
263
11
Electric Powered ........................................... 27
Electric Remote .............................................27
Heated ........................................................... 27
Outside ....................................................26, 27
Rearview ...............................................26, 193
Vanity
............................................................. 26
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ............................................................. 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................189
Mopar® Parts ..................................................... 257
MP3 Control ....................................................... 75
Multi-Function Control Lever .............................68
O
Occupant Restraints ..........................................36
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ..........................................258
Outside Rearview Mirrors ........................... 26, 27
P
Paddle Shif
t Mode ...........................................139
Paddle Shifters ................................................ 139
Paint Care ........................................................ 249
Panic Alarm ........................................................ 13
Parking Brake ............................................94, 135
ParkSense
Front And Rear ............................................170
Side Distance ..............................................175
ParkSense System, Rear .................................170
Passing Light ......................................................68
Passive Entry ......................................................22
Pedestrian Warning System ...................155, 157
Performance .......................................................87
Pets .................................................................. 205
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........238
Power
Brakes ......................................................... 135
Distribution Center (Fuses) ........................223
Door Locks .................................................... 21
Hatch Release ...............................................77
Mirrors ........................................................... 27
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........74, 75
Seats ..............................................................31
St
eering ......................................................... 64
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................64
Windows ........................................................ 25
Power Seats
Forward ..........................................................31
Lumbar .......................................................... 32
Rearward ....................................................... 31
Recline ...........................................................32
Power Start Button ............................................ 65
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ......................41
Programmable Features ................................. 103
R
Radial Ply Tires ................................................ 242
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 213
Radio Operation ...............................................102
Radio Remote Controls ................................... 103
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............................ 67
Rear Camera ........................................... 170, 177
Rear Cross Path ...............................................163
Rear ParkSense System ..................................170
Rear Seat Reminder Alert ............................... 155
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................... 35
Recreational Towing ........................................ 153
Refrigerant ....................................................... 210
Release, Hood ....................................................80
Reminder, Lights On .......................................... 69
Reminder, Seat Belt ...........................................37
Remote Control
Starting System .............................................17
Remote Hatch Release ......................................77
Remote Keyless Entry ........................................12
Arm The Alarm .............................................. 19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............14
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ..........103
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................... 18
Remote Starting System ....................................17
Replacement Bulbs .........................................233
Replacement Keys .............................................14
Replacement Tires .......................................... 243
Reporting Safety Defects ................................ 257
Restraints, Child ................................................ 54
Restraints, Head ................................................29
Rotation, Tires ..................................................246
264
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..........................205
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................... 206
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................... 257
Safety Information, Tire ...................................234
Safety Tips ....................................................... 205
Schedule, Maintenance .................................. 207
Seat Belt Reminder ........................................... 93
Seat Belts .................................................. 37, 205
Adjustable Shoulder Belt
..............................39
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ....... 39
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 39
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ..............42
Child Restraints ............................................ 54
Extender ........................................................ 41
Front Seat ...............................................37–39
Inspection ................................................... 205
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .......................39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ......................39
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................................... 38
Operating Instructions ..................................39
Pregnant Women .......................................... 41
Rear Seat ...................................................... 38
Reminder .......................................................37
Seat Belt Extender ........................................ 41
Untwisting Procedure ................................... 39
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................. 250
Seats ............................................................ 30, 31
Adjustment
.......................................30, 31, 33
Bolster Adjustment .......................................32
Easy Entry ......................................................32
Extend ............................................................32
Head Restraints ............................................29
Height Adjustment ........................................ 31
Power ............................................................. 31
Rear Folding .................................................. 35
Seatback Release ..................................30, 35
Tilting .......................................................30, 31
V
ented ........................................................... 33
Ventilated ...................................................... 33
Security Alarm ............................................. 20, 93
Arm The System ............................................19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................... 252
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 17
Sentry Key Replacement ................................... 14
Service Assistance .......................................... 255
Service Contract .............................................. 257
Service Manuals ..............................................258
Shoulder Belts ................................................... 38
Side View Mirror Adjustment ...................... 26, 27
Signals, Turn .......................................69, 96,
206
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................. 245
Snow Tires ........................................................244
Spare Tires .......................................................244
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................. 184
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................... 181
Starting ...................................................... 17, 132
Button ............................................................65
Remote .......................................................... 17
Starting And Operating ................................... 132
Starting Procedures ........................................ 132
Steering .............................................................. 63
Column Lock ................................................. 63
Power .............................................................64
Tilt Column ............................................. 63, 64
Wheel, Heated
.............................................. 64
Wheel, Tilt ...............................................63, 64
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................... 103
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ............................................................103
Storage .......................................................74, 248
Storage, V
ehicle ......................................100, 248
Storing Your Vehicle .........................................248
Sunglasses Storage ...........................................75
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .......44
Surround View Camera System ............. 170, 178
Symbol Glossary ...................................................8
System, Remote Starting ...................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column .....................63, 64
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .... 98, 100
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..................................... 80
Tilt Steering Column ................................... 63, 64
Time Delay
Headlight .......................................................69
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............238
Tire Markings ...................................................234
Tire Safety Information ....................................234
Tires ........................................206, 241, 244,
247
265
11
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................... 243
Air Pressure
.................................................241
Chains ......................................................... 245
General Information ...........................241, 244
High Speed ..................................................242
Inflation Pressure ....................................... 241
Life Of Tires .................................................243
Load Capacity .................................... 238, 239
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..95, 189
Quality Grading ........................................... 247
Radial .......................................................... 242
Replacement ...............................................243
Rotation .......................................................246
Safety ..................................................234, 241
Sizes ............................................................235
Snow Tires ...................................................244
Spare Tires ..................................................244
Spinning ...................................................... 242
Tread Wear Indicators ................................ 242
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................253
To Open Hood .....................................................80
Towing .............................................................. 153
Behind A Mo
torhome ................................. 153
Disabled Vehicle .........................................203
Recreational ................................................153
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..........................153
Traction ................................................... 153, 154
Traction Control ............................................... 160
Traffic Sign Assist System ...............................188
Trailer Towing ...................................................153
Transaxle
Automatic ....................................................136
Operation
.................................................... 136
Transporting Pets ............................................ 205
Tread Wear Indicators ..................................... 242
Turn Signals .................................................69, 96
U
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ............. 22
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 22
Underhood Compartment ...............................209
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................247
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .......................39
USB .....................................................................75
V
Vanity Mirrors .....................................................26
Vehicle Certification Label .............................. 152
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............252
Vehicle Loading ............................. 152, 153, 239
Vehicle Maintenance .......................................210
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .......................8
Vehicle Security Alarm .......................................19
Vehicle Storage .......................................100, 248
Voice Command ...............................................103
Voice Recognition ............................................ 103
Voice Recognition System (VR) .......................103
W
Warning Flasher
s, Hazard ...............................193
Warning Lights
Red ................................................................ 90
Yello
w .............................................................93
Warning Lights And Messages ..........................90
Washing Vehicle ...............................................249
Water
Driving Through .......................................... 154
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............................ 245
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............................. 245
Wind Buffeting ................................................... 26
Window Fogging ...............................................100
Windows ............................................................. 25
Power .............................................................25
Rese
t Auto-Up ............................................... 26
Windshield Defroster .......................................205
Windshield Washers ..........................................66
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................ 212
Windshield Wipers .............................................66
Wipers Blade Replacement ............................ 212
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .......................................67
Wireless Charging Pad .......................................76
266
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC
strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular
telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and
stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information,
visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge
®
brand dealer.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
Second Edition
45_LB_OM_EN_USC
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-
DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO
AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
USA
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following
an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Dodge
®
brand vehicle. Simply download
the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword
“Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
©2024 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Dodge est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc.,utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
